Product Detail Manual AT
User Manual: at
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 374
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE SECTION AT AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A B AT D E CONTENTS INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 5 Alphabetical Index .................................................... 5 DTC No. Index ......................................................... 6 PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 7 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 7 Precautions for Battery Service ................................ 7 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine .................................................... 7 Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement .................................. 8 Precautions .............................................................. 9 Service Notice or Precautions ................................ 10 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 10 PREPARATION ..........................................................11 Special Service Tools ..............................................11 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 12 A/T FLUID ................................................................. 13 Changing A/T Fluid ................................................ 13 Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 13 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 15 Cross-Sectional View ............................................. 15 Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 16 TCM Function ......................................................... 27 CAN Communication .............................................. 28 Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................... 30 Line Pressure Control ............................................ 31 Shift Control ........................................................... 32 Lock-Up Control ..................................................... 33 Engine Brake Control ............................................. 35 Control Valve .......................................................... 35 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 37 Introduction ............................................................ 37 OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 37 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 37 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 37 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 40 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 41 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 41 Revision; 2004 April Fail-Safe ................................................................. 41 How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 43 A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 48 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 49 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................... 50 Check Before Engine is Started .............................. 54 Check at Idle ........................................................... 54 Cruise Test - Part 1 ................................................. 55 Cruise Test - Part 2 ................................................. 57 Cruise Test - Part 3 ................................................. 58 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ...................... 59 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up .................................................. 59 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-Up ........................................................... 59 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 60 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ........... 83 CONSULT-II ............................................................ 86 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ........... 96 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .............. 98 Description .............................................................. 98 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 98 Possible Cause ....................................................... 98 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 98 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ................................ 99 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 100 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 101 Description ............................................................ 101 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 101 Possible Cause ..................................................... 101 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 101 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG .......................... 102 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 103 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 105 Description ............................................................ 105 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 105 Possible Cause ..................................................... 105 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 105 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 106 AT-1 2003 G35 Coupe F G H I J K L M Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 107 Component Inspection .......................................... 109 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 110 Description ............................................................ 110 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 110 Possible Cause ..................................................... 110 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 110 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ..........................111 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 112 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 115 Description ............................................................ 115 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 115 Possible Cause ..................................................... 115 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 115 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 115 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 117 Description ............................................................ 117 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 117 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 117 Possible Cause ..................................................... 117 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 117 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV .............................. 118 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 119 Component Inspection .......................................... 121 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 122 Description ............................................................ 122 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 122 Possible Cause ..................................................... 122 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 122 Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ........................ 123 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 124 Component Inspection .......................................... 126 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 127 Description ............................................................ 127 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 127 Possible Cause ..................................................... 127 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 127 Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ............................ 128 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 129 Component Inspection .......................................... 131 DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) .................................................. 132 Description ............................................................ 132 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 132 Possible Cause ..................................................... 132 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 132 Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER ........................ 133 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 135 Component Inspection .......................................... 137 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) ...................................................................... 138 Description ............................................................ 138 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 138 Possible Cause ..................................................... 138 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 138 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 139 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE Revision; 2004 April (ROM) ...................................................................... 140 Description ............................................................ 140 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 140 Possible Cause ..................................................... 140 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 140 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 141 DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM) ............................................................... 142 Description ............................................................ 142 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 142 Possible Cause ..................................................... 142 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 142 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 143 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ........ 144 Description ............................................................ 144 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 144 Possible Cause ..................................................... 144 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 144 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 144 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................................. 146 Description ............................................................ 146 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 146 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 146 Possible Cause ..................................................... 146 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 146 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 147 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 148 Component Inspection .......................................... 151 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR .... 152 Description ............................................................ 152 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 152 Possible Cause ..................................................... 152 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 152 Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ......................... 153 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 154 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ....... 157 Description ............................................................ 157 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 157 Possible Cause ..................................................... 157 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 157 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 157 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK ................................. 159 Description ............................................................ 159 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 159 Possible Cause ..................................................... 159 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 159 Wiring Diagram — AT — I/LOCK .......................... 160 Judgement of A/T Interlock ................................... 164 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 164 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ............... 166 Description ............................................................ 166 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 166 Possible Cause ..................................................... 166 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 166 Wiring Diagram — AT — E/BRE ........................... 167 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 168 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE . 170 Description ............................................................ 170 AT-2 2003 G35 Coupe On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 170 Possible Cause .................................................... 170 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 170 Wiring Diagram — AT — I/C ................................ 171 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 172 Component Inspection ......................................... 174 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION .............................................................. 175 Description ........................................................... 175 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 175 Possible Cause .................................................... 175 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 175 Wiring Diagram — AT — I/CF .............................. 176 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 177 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE . 179 Description ........................................................... 179 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 179 Possible Cause .................................................... 179 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 179 Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/B ............................. 180 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 181 Component Inspection ......................................... 183 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION .............................................................. 184 Description ........................................................... 184 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 184 Possible Cause .................................................... 184 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 184 Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/BF ........................... 185 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 186 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. 189 Description ........................................................... 189 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 189 Possible Cause .................................................... 189 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 189 Wiring Diagram — AT — D/C ............................... 190 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 191 Component Inspection ......................................... 193 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION .............................................................. 194 Description ........................................................... 194 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 194 Possible Cause .................................................... 194 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 194 Wiring Diagram — AT — D/CF ............................. 195 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 196 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 198 Description ........................................................... 198 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 198 Possible Cause .................................................... 198 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 198 Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/C .......................... 199 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 200 Component Inspection ......................................... 202 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION ............................. 203 Description ........................................................... 203 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 203 Revision; 2004 April Possible Cause ..................................................... 203 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 203 Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/CF ........................ 204 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 205 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE ..................................................................... 208 Description ............................................................ 208 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 208 Possible Cause ..................................................... 208 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 208 Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/B ............................. 209 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 210 Component Inspection .......................................... 212 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION .................................................. 213 Description ............................................................ 213 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 213 Possible Cause ..................................................... 213 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 213 Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/BF ........................... 214 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 215 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH .................. 217 Description ............................................................ 217 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode . 217 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 217 Possible Cause ..................................................... 217 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 217 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ......................... 218 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 219 Component Inspection .......................................... 220 Position Indicator Lamp ........................................ 220 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 ............... 221 Description ............................................................ 221 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 221 Possible Cause ..................................................... 221 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 221 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW1 ......................... 222 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 223 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 ............... 225 Description ............................................................ 225 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 225 Possible Cause ..................................................... 225 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 225 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW3 ......................... 226 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 227 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 ............... 229 Description ............................................................ 229 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 229 Possible Cause ..................................................... 229 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 229 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW5 ......................... 230 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 231 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 ............... 233 Description ............................................................ 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 233 Possible Cause ..................................................... 233 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 233 AT-3 2003 G35 Coupe A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW6 ......................... 234 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 235 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT ........................................................................ 237 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 237 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 239 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 239 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On . 241 Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position . 243 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ...... 243 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 245 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ......................... 246 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. 249 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position . 251 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 255 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 257 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 259 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 262 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 264 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up ............................ 266 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition ................. 269 Lock-Up Is Not Released ...................................... 270 Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle ................ 271 Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode .................. 272 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear ............ 273 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear ............ 275 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear ........... 277 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear ............ 279 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .... 281 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 283 Control Device Removal and Installation .............. 283 Adjustment of A/T Position ................................... 284 Checking of A/T Position ...................................... 284 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 286 Description ............................................................ 286 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 286 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ........................... 287 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 288 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 291 Components ......................................................... 291 Removal ............................................................... 292 Installation ............................................................. 293 Revision; 2004 April ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 294 Control Valve Assembly ........................................ 294 Rear Oil Seal ......................................................... 300 Parking Components ............................................ 301 AIR BREATHER HOSE ........................................... 307 Removal and Installation ....................................... 307 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ................................. 308 Removal and Installation ....................................... 308 OVERHAUL ............................................................. 311 Components .......................................................... 311 Oil Channel ........................................................... 317 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 318 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 319 Disassembly .......................................................... 319 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 334 Oil Pump ............................................................... 334 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ................... 336 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ..... 339 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub .............................................. 344 High and Low Reverse Clutch .............................. 349 Direct Clutch ......................................................... 350 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 352 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 352 Adjustment ............................................................ 363 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 365 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 371 General Specifications .......................................... 371 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ..................... 371 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up ................................................ 371 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-Up .......................................................... 371 Stall Speed ............................................................ 371 Line Pressure ........................................................ 372 Solenoid Valves .................................................... 372 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 372 Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 372 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) ... 372 Reverse Brake ...................................................... 373 Total End Play ....................................................... 373 AT-4 2003 G35 Coupe INDEX FOR DTC INDEX FOR DTC Alphabetical Index PFP:00024 A ACS002AD NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-98 . B DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) OBD-II Except OBD-II CONSULT-II GST*1 CONSULT-II only “A/T” A/T 1ST E/BRAKING — P1731 AT-166 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC — P1841 AT-221 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC — P1843 AT-225 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC — P1845 AT-229 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC — P1846 AT-233 A/T INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-159 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 P0744 AT-122 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 P1710 AT-146 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-98 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 P1762 AT-189 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 P1764 AT-194 ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 P0725 AT-115 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 P1757 AT-179 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 P1759 AT-184 Reference page HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 P1767 AT-198 HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 P1769 AT-203 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 P1752 AT-170 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 P1754 AT-175 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 P0745 AT-127 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 P1772 AT-208 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 P1774 AT-213 MANU MODE SW/CIR — P1815 AT-217 P0705 P0705 AT-105 STARTER RELAY/CIRC — P0615 AT-101 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 P0740 AT-117 TCM·EEPROM — P1704 AT-142 TCM-POWER SUPPLY — P1701 AT-132 TCM·RAM — P1702 AT-138 TCM·ROM — P1703 AT-140 TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 P1705 AT-144 TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 P1716 AT-152 VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR — P1721 AT-157 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 P0720 AT-110 PNP SW/CIRC *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. Revision; 2004 April AT-5 2003 G35 Coupe AT D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC DTC No. Index ACS002AE NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-98 . DTC OBD-II Except OBD-II CONSULT-II GST*1 CONSULT-II only “A/T” Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page — P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC AT-101 P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-105 P0710 P1710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-146 P0720 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT AT-110 P0725 P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-115 P0740 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-117 P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-122 P0745 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-127 — P1701 TCM-POWER SUPPLY AT-132 — P1702 TCM·RAM AT-138 — P1703 TCM·ROM AT-140 — P1704 TCM·EEPROM AT-142 P1705 P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-144 P1716 P1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC AT-152 — P1721 VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR AT-157 P1730 P1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-159 — P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING AT-166 P1752 P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-170 P1754 P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-175 P1757 P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-179 P1759 P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-184 P1762 P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-189 P1764 P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-194 P1767 P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-198 P1769 P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-203 P1772 P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-208 P1774 P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-213 — P1815 MANU MODE SW/CIRC AT-217 — P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC AT-221 — P1843 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC AT-225 — P1845 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC AT-229 — P1846 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC AT-233 U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-98 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. Revision; 2004 April AT-6 2003 G35 Coupe PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A ACS002AF The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. F ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G Precautions for Battery Service ACS006HA Before disconnecting the battery, lower both the driver and passenger windows. This will prevent any interference between the window edge and the vehicle when the door is opened/closed. During normal operation, the window slightly raises and lowers automatically to prevent any window to vehicle interference. The automatic window function will not work with the battery disconnected. Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine I ACS002AG The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer. Revision; 2004 April AT-7 H 2003 G35 Coupe J K L M PRECAUTIONS Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement ACS002AH CAUTION: ● Check data (Unit ID) in TCM with data monitor of CONSULT-II before replacing A/T assembly or control valve assembly. ● Check if new data (Unit ID) are entered correctly after replacing A/T assembly or control valve assembly and erasing data in TCM. ● When replacing A/T assembly, control valve assembly or TCM, refer to the pattern table below and erase the EEPROM in the TCM if necessary. EEPROM ERASING PATTERNS A/T assembly or control valve assembly TCM Erasing EEPROM in TCM Replaced Replaced Not required Not required because the EEPROM in the TCM is in the default state. Not replaced Replaced Not required Not required because the EEPROM in the TCM is in the default state. Required Required because data has been written in the EEPROM in the TCM and because the TCM cannot write data from the ROM assembly in the transmission. Replaced Not replaced Remarks METHOD FOR ERASING THE EEPROM IN THE TCM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. Turn ignition switch “ON” . Confirm that CONSULT-II turn “ON”. Move selector lever in “R” position. Touch “START” on CONSULT-II. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Fully press the accelerator pedal (8/8 throttle), and hold it in the fully open position. (This will set the closed throttle position signal to “OFF”.) Touch “ERASE” on CONSULT-II, and then touch “YES”. Wait 3 seconds and then release the accelerator pedal. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position. METHOD FOR WRITING DATA FROM THE ROM ASSEMBLY IN THE TRANSMISSION In the following procedure, the TCM reads data from the ROM assembly and writes it to the EEPROM in the TCM. 1. With the EEPROM in the TCM erased. 2. Move selector lever in “P” position. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON” . CHECK METHOD ● ● Normal: About 2 seconds after the ignition switch “ON”, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds. Abnormal: Even after the ignition switch “ON”, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not light up after 2 seconds or illuminates immediately. Cope for abnormal ● ● Replace the control valve assembly. Replace the TCM. Revision; 2004 April AT-8 2003 G35 Coupe PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ACS002AI A Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. B AT D SEF289H ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. E F G SEF291H ● Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal inspection and make sure whether TCM functions properly or not. AT-83, "TCM INSPECTION TABLE". H I J K MEF040DA L ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. M SEF217U ● ● ● ● ● Always use the specified brand of A/T fluid. Refer to MA-9, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Use paper rags not cloth rags during work. After replacing the A/T fluid, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transaxle. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. Revision; 2004 April AT-9 2003 G35 Coupe PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transaxle. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transaxle is disassembled. It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. After overhaul, refill the transaxle with new ATF. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . Service Notice or Precautions ACS002AJ OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through the blinking pattern of the A/T CHECK indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on AT-87, "Self-Diagnostic Result Test Mode" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. ● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories. Always perform the procedure on AT-38, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL. For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-50, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-63, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" . ● Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ACS002AK When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-15, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Revision; 2004 April AT-10 2003 G35 Coupe PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A ACS002AL The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST2505S001 (J-34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1 ST25051001 ( — ) Oil pressure gauge 2 ST25052000 ( — ) Hose 3 ST25053000 ( — ) Joint pipe 4 ST25054000 ( — ) Adapter 5 ST25055000 ( — ) Adapter Measuring line pressure B AT D E F ZZA0600D G KV31103600 (J-45674) Joint pipe adapter (With ST25054000) Measuring line pressure H I ZZA1227D ST33400001 (J-26082) Drift a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia. J ● Installing rear oil seal ● Installing oil pump housing oil seal K NT086 KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) Clutch spring compressor a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in) L Installing reverse brake return spring retainer M NT423 ST25850000 (J-25721-A) Sliding hammer a: 179 mm (7.05 in) b: 70 mm (2.76 in) c: 40 mm (1.57 in) d: M12X1.75P Remove oil pump assembly NT422 Revision; 2004 April AT-11 2003 G35 Coupe PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools ACS002AM Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Drift a: 22mm (0.87 in) Installing manual shaft oil seal NT083 Revision; 2004 April AT-12 2003 G35 Coupe A/T FLUID A/T FLUID Changing A/T Fluid 1. 2. 3. 4. PFP:KLE40 A ACS004LA Warm up A/T fluid. Stop engine. B Remove the tightening bolt for A/T fluid level gauge. Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid. Always refill same volume with drained fluid. ● To replace the A/T fluid, pour in new fluid at the charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same AT time drain the old fluid from the radiator cooler hose return side. ● When the color of the fluid coming out is about the same as the color of the new fluid, the replacement is complete. The amount of new transmission fluid to use should be 30 to 50% of the stipulated amount. D A/T fluid: Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF Fluid capacity: 10.3 (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 lmp qt) E CAUTION: ● Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF. Do not mix with other fluid. ● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty. ● When filling A/T fluid, take care not to scatter heat generating parts such as exhaust. Drain plug: : 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) 5. 6. 7. Run engine at idle speed for 5 minutes. Check fluid level and condition. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If fluid is still dirty, repeat step 2. through 5. Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the fluid charging pipe. e. f. 5. ACS004LB Warm up engine. Check for fluid leakage. Remove the tightening bolt for A/T fluid level gauge. Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30 to 50°C (86 to 122°F) using “COLD” range on A/T fluid level gauge as follows. Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake. Start engine and move selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in “P” position. Check fluid level with engine idling. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and wipe clean with lint-free paper. CAUTION: When wiping away the fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth one. Re-insert A/T fluid level gauge into charging pipe as far as it will go. CAUTION: To check fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the end of the charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions. Remove A/T fluid level gauge and note reading. If reading is at low side of range, add fluid to the charging pipe. CAUTION: Do not overfill. Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas. Revision; 2004 April I J Checking A/T Fluid a. b. c. d. G H Level gauge bolt: : 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) 1. 2. 3. 4. F AT-13 2003 G35 Coupe K L M A/T FLUID 6. Make the fluid temperature approximately 65°C (149°F). NOTE: Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown in figure. Therefore, be certain to perform operation while checking data with CONSULT-II. a. b. c. 7. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP 1”. Re-check fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using “HOT” range on A/T fluid level gauge. CAUTION: ● When wiping away the fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth one. ● To check fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the end of the charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions as shown. Check fluid condition. ● If fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, refer to check operation of A/T. Flush cooling system after repair of A/T. ● If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair of A/T.Refer to CO-12, "RADISCIA2899E ATOR" . Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the fluid charging pipe. SLIA0016E 8. 9. Level gauge bolt: : 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) Revision; 2004 April AT-14 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Cross-Sectional View PFP:31036 A ACS002AP B AT D E F G H I SCIA5262E 1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear 4. Direct clutch 5. High and low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake 7. Drum support Low coast brake J 8. Forward brake 9. 10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump 13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch 16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch 19. Rear extension 20. Output shaft K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-15 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Shift Mechanism ACS002AQ The automatic transmission uses compact dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight. It also employs an optimum shift control and super wide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and acceleration during medium and high-speed operation. CONSTRUCTION PCIA0002J 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake Forward one-way clutch 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE Name of the Part Abbreviation Function Front brake (1) Fr/B Input clutch (2) I/C Connects the input shaft (12), the front internal gear (14) and the mid internal gear (13). Direct clutch (3) D/C Connects the rear carrier (15) and the rear sun gear (16). High and low reverse clutch (4) HLR/C Fastens the front sun gear (11). Connects the mid sun gear (17) and the rear sun gear (16). Reverse brake (5) R/B Fastens the rear carrier (15). Forward brake (6) F/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17). LC/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17). Low coast brake (7) 1st one-way clutch (8) Forward one-way clutch (9) 3rd one-way clutch (10) Revision; 2004 April 1st/O.C Allows the rear sun gear (16) to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear (17) but fastens it for reverse rotation. F/O.C Allows the mid sun gear (17) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation. 3rd/O.C Allows the front sun gear (11) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation. AT-16 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM CLUTCH AND BAND CHART A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA4755E Revision; 2004 April AT-17 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM POWER TRANSMISSION “N” Position Since both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. “P” Position ● ● The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. The parking pawl linked with the selector lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft mechanically. PCIA0003J 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Direct clutch Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision; 2004 April AT-18 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D1 ” Position ● ● ● ● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. The first one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear. The third one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear. During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine brake is not activated. A B AT D E F G H I J SCIA1512E 1. Front brake 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 2. Input clutch 3. 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision; 2004 April AT-19 K Direct clutch L M 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “M1” Position ● ● ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear. The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear. During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake functions. SCIA1513E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision; 2004 April AT-20 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D2 ” Position ● ● ● ● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. The third one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear. The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine brake is not activated. A B AT D E F G H I J SCIA1514E 1. Front brake 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 2. Input clutch 3. 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision; 2004 April AT-21 K Direct clutch L M 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “M2” Position ● ● ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear. During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake functions. SCIA1515E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision; 2004 April AT-22 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D3 ” and “M3” Position ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected. A B AT D E F G H I J SCIA1516E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision; 2004 April AT-23 K L M 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D4 ” and “M4” Position ● ● ● ● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected. The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected. The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three planetary gears rotate forward as one unit. SCIA1517E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 4. 7. 3. Direct clutch High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision; 2004 April AT-24 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D5 ” and “M5” Position ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The input clutch is coupled, and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected. The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected. A B AT D E F G H I J SCIA1518E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision; 2004 April AT-25 K L M 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “R” Position ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected. The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier. SCIA1519E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision; 2004 April AT-26 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM TCM Function ACS002AR A The function of the TCM is to: ● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. ● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. ● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. B CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always AT controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. SENSORS PNP switch Throttle position sensor Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position signal Wide-open throttle position signal Engine speed signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Revolution sensor Vehicle speed sensor Manual mode switch Stop lamp switch signal Turbine revolution sensor ATF pressure SW Þ TCM ACTUATORS Shift control Line pressure control Lock-up control Engine brake control Timing control Fail-safe control Self-diagnosis CONSULT-II communication line Duet-EA control CAN system Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Low coast brake solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve A/T CHECK indicator lamp Starter relay Back-up lamp relay Þ CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM D E F G H I J K L M SCIA5325E Revision; 2004 April AT-27 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication ACS002AS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT System diagram SKIA1880E Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive ECM TCM Combination meter Engine speed signal T R R Engine coolant temperature signal T R R Accelerator pedal position signal T R Closed throttle position signal T R Wide open throttle position signal T R Battery voltage signal T R Signals Stop lamp switch signal R Fuel consumption monitor signal T A/T self-diagnosis signal R BCM Steering angle sensor VDC/TCS/ ABS control unit R R T R T A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal T R A/T position indicator signal T R ABS operation signal R T A/T shift schedule change demand signal R T Air conditioner switch signal R A/C compressor request signal T A/C compressor feedback signal T Blower fan motor switch signal R Cooling fan motor operation signal R Position lights request signal R R T T R Revision; 2004 April T R T R R High beam request signal High beam status signal R T Low beam request signal Low beam status signal IPDM E/R T R R T R T AT-28 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Signals ECM TCM Combination meter Front fog lights request signal BCM Steering angle sensor VDC/TCS/ ABS control unit T R R Sleep request 1 signal R R T Sleep request 2 signal B T T AT T R Wake up request 1 signal R T R Wake up request 2 signal R T R Door switch signal (without navigation system) R T R Door switch signal (with navigation system) T R Turn indicator signal R T Seat belt buckle switch signal T R Oil pressure switch signal R Buzzer output signal R T Trunk switch signal R T ASCD main switch signal T R ASCD cruise signal T R Output shaft revolution signal R F T G H T T R Front wiper stop position signal R T Rear window defogger switch signal T R R T Manual mode signal R T Not manual mode signal R T Manual mode shift up signal R T Manual mode shift down signal R T Manual mode indicator signal T R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal R T T AT-29 J L R Steering angle sensor signal I K Hood switch signal Revision; 2004 April D E Front wiper request signal Rear window defogger control signal A R R Vehicle speed signal IPDM E/R R 2003 G35 Coupe M A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Input/Output Signal of TCM Line pressure control Vehicle speed control Shift control Lock-up control Engine brake control Fail-safe function (*3) Self-diagnostics function Accelerator pedal position signal (*5) X X X X X X X Vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) X X X X X X Vehicle speed sensor MTR(*1) (*5) X X X X Closed throttle position signal(*5) (*2) X (*2) X (*2) X (*2) X Turbine revolution sensor 1 X X X X Turbine revolution sensor 2 (for 4th speed only) X X X X Control item Wide-open throttle position signal(*5) Input ACS002AT (*2) X X X Stop lamp switch signal(*5) A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X (*4) X (*4) X X X X X X X Direct clutch solenoid (ATF pressure switch 5) X X X X Input clutch solenoid (ATF pressure switch 3) X X X X High and low reverse clutch solenoid (ATF pressure switch 6) X X X X Front brake solenoid (ATF pressure switch 1) X X X X Low coast brake solenoid (ATF pressure switch 2) X X X X X X X X X X X X Line pressure solenoid X X X X release signal(*5) Output X X X Overdrive TCM power supply voltage signal X X Cruise signal(*5) ASCD (*4) X (*4) X Engine speed signals(*5) PNP switch X X TCC solenoid Self-diagnostics X X table(*6) X *1: Spare for vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) *2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal *3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function. *4: Used as a condition for starting self-diagnostics; if self-diagnostics are not started, it is judged that there is some kind of error. *5: Input by CAN communications. *6: Output by CAN communications. Revision; 2004 April AT-30 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Line Pressure Control ● ● ACS002AU When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is sent from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid. This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving state. A B AT D E PCIA0007E LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN ● ● The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the driving state. In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid current valve and thus controls the line pressure. F G H Normal Control Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the engine drive force. I J K PCIA0008E L Back-up Control (Engine brake) When the select operation is executed during driving and the transmission is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed. M PCIA0009E Revision; 2004 April AT-31 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM During Shift Change The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set. For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to input torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic is according to engine speed, during engine brake operation. PCIA0010E At Low Fluid Temperature When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed temperature, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic. PCIA0011E Shift Control ACS002AV The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic is attained. PCIA0012E SHIFT CHANGE The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque information, etc. Revision; 2004 April AT-32 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Shift Change System Diagram A B AT D E F PCIA0013E *1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil pressure at real-time to achieve the best gear ratio. Lock-Up Control ACS002AW G H The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases the torque converter clutch piston. I Lock-up Operation Condition Table J Selector lever D position, M5 position M4 position Gear position 5 4 4 Lock-up × – × Slip lock-up × × – K L TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL Lock-Up Control System Diagram M PCIA0014E Lock-Up Released ● In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled. Revision; 2004 April AT-33 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Lock-Up Applied ● In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled. SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque converter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock. Half-Clutched State ● The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to steadily increase the torque converter clutch solenoid pressure. In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is completed smoothly. Slip Lock-Up Control ● In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed. This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gear at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low degree of opening. Revision; 2004 April AT-34 2003 G35 Coupe A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Engine Brake Control ● ACS002AX The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling. Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling and the engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally. A B AT D E F G PCIA0015E ● The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls the coupling and releasing of the low coast brake. The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force. Control Valve H I ACS002AY FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE Name Torque converter regulator valve J Function In order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive, the line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pressure). Pressure regulator valve Pressure regulator plug Pressure regulator sleeve Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for the driving state. Front brake control valve When the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (front brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) Accumulator control valve Adjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston and low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state. Pilot valve A Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required for line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control. Pilot valve B Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required for shift change control. Low coast brake switching valve During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve. Low coast brake reducing valve When the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake. N-R accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected. Direct clutch piston switching valve Operates in 4th gear and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity. High and low reverse clutch control valve When the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low reverse clutch. (In 1st, 3rd, 4th and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) Revision; 2004 April AT-35 2003 G35 Coupe K L M A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Name Function Input clutch control valve When the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (input clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4th and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) Direct clutch control valve When the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (direct clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) TCC control valve TCC control plug TCC control sleeve Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by executing the lock-up operation transiently, lock-up smoothly. Torque converter lubrication valve Operates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system oil path. Cool bypass valve Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it. Line pressure relief valve Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit. N-D accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected. Manual valve Sends line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which the line pressure is not sent drain. FUNCTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH Name Function Pressure switch 1 (FR/B) Detects any malfunction in the front brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Pressure switch 2 (LC/B) Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Pressure switch 3 (I/C) Detects any malfunction in the input clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Pressure switch 5 (D/C) Detects any malfunction in the direct clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Pressure switch 6 (HLR/C) Detects any malfunction in the high and low reverse clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Revision; 2004 April AT-36 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction PFP:00028 A ACS002AZ The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT refer to AT-87, "Self-Diagnostic Result Test Mode" . OBD-II Function for A/T System ACS002B0 The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II D E F ACS002B1 ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function. G TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC (diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. I OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) J ACS002B2 HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. ( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc. These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. SAT014K Revision; 2004 April AT-37 2003 G35 Coupe K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. SAT015K If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”. SAT016K Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For detail, refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-II Function" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 Items Freeze frame data 2 3 Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. HOW TO ERASE DTC The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as described following. ● If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours. ● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode selector on the ECM. The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-51, "Emission-Related Diagnostic Information" . ● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) ● Freeze frame data Revision; 2004 April AT-38 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ● ● ● 1st trip freeze frame data System readiness test (SRT) codes Test values A HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. AT Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. D Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice. Touch “ENGINE”. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. E Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) F G H I J K L M SCIA5671E HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) 1. 2. 3. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-96, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-119, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" . Revision; 2004 April AT-39 2003 G35 Coupe ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) The A/T CHECK indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel. 1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-96, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.) 3. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No tools)”. Refer to EC-64, "How to Erase DTC" . Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ACS002B3 DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” without the engine running. This is a bulb check. ● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-32, "WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-628, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" . 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. SEF217U Revision; 2004 April AT-40 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DTC Inspection Priority Chart PFP:00004 A ACS002B4 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. B NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-98 . AT Priority Detected items (DTC) 1 U1000 CAN communication line 2 Except above D Fail-Safe ACS002B5 The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is a malfunction in a main electronic control input/output signal circuit. In fail safe mode, even if the selector lever is “D” or “M” mode, the transmission is fixed in 2nd or 4th (depending on the breakdown position), so the customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”. When fail-safe mode is triggered, when the ignition switch is switched “ON”, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes for about 8 seconds. (Refer to AT-96, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" ). Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on the brake with the wheels spinning drastically and stopping the tire rotation), the transmission can go into fail-safe mode. If this happens, switch “OFF” the ignition switch for 10 seconds, then switch it “ON” again to return to the normal shift pattern. Also, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes for about 8 seconds once, then is cleared. Therefore, the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, so handle according to the “diagnostics flow” (Refer to AT-44 ). E F G H FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to make driving possible. I Vehicle Speed Sensor ● Signals are input from two systems - from vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) installed on the transmission and from combination meter so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in one of the systems. And if vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) has unusual cases, 5th gear and manual mode are prohibited. K Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor ● J If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow systems, the engine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible. L Throttle Position Sensor ● If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal sent from the ECM which is based on input indicating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order to make driving possible. PNP Switch ● In the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched “OFF”, the starter relay is switched “OFF” (starter starting is disabled), and the position is fixed to the “D” range to make driving possible. Starter Relay ● The starter relay is switched “OFF”. (Starter starting is disabled.) Revision; 2004 April AT-41 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Interlock ● ● If there is an A/T interlock judgment malfunction, the transmission is fixed in 2nd gear to make driving possible. NOTE: When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2nd gear, a turbine revolution sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is not a turbine revolution sensor malfunction. When the coupling pattern below is detected, the fail-safe action corresponding to the pattern is performed. A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE ●: NG X: OK Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe function ATF pressure switch output Gear position A/T interlock coupling pattern SW3 (I/C) SW6 (HLR/ C) SW5 (D/C) SW1 (FR/B) SW2 (LC/B) 3rd – X X – ● 4th – X X – 5th X X – X Fail-safe function I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ● Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ● Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF A/T 1st Engine Braking ● When there is an A/T first gear engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is switched “OFF” to avoid the engine brake operation. Line Pressure Solenoid ● The solenoid is switched “OFF” and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make driving possible. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid ● The solenoid is switched “OFF” to release the lock-up. Low Coast Brake Solenoid ● When a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs, in order to make driving possible, if the solenoid is “ON”, the transmission is held in 2nd gear; if the solenoid is “OFF”, the transmission is held in 4th gear. (engine brake is not applied in 1st and 2nd gear.) Input Clutch Solenoid ● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is held in 4th gear to make driving possible. Direct Clutch Solenoid ● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is held in 4th gear to make driving possible. Front Brake Solenoid ● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid “ON”, in order to make driving possible, the A/T is held in 5th gear; if the solenoid is OFF, 4th gear. High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid ● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is held in 4th gear to make driving possible. Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2 ● The control is the same as if there were no turbine revolution sensors, 5th gear and manual mode are prohibited. Revision; 2004 April AT-42 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair ACS002B6 A INTRODUCTION The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves. The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal B sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malAT functions in its memory. Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operD ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc. SAT631IB It is much more difficult to diagnose an error that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the AT-44, "WORK FLOW" . E F G H SAT632I I Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such errors, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” as shown on the example (Refer to AT-45 ) should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Also check related Service bulletins. J K L SEF234G M Revision; 2004 April AT-43 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-45 ) and “Diagnostic Worksheet” (Refer to AT-45 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible. Work Flow Chart SCIA0501E *1. AT-45 *2. AT-45 *3. AT-41 *4. AT-50 *5. AT-50, AT-51 *6. AT-53 *7. AT-86 *8. AT-37 *9. AT-96 *10. AT-98 *11. AT-237 *12. AT-239 *13. AT-281 *14. AT-60 *15. AT-38 *16. AT-98 *17. AT-233 *18. EC-51 Revision; 2004 April AT-44 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Information From Customer A KEY POINTS ● WHAT..... Vehicle and A/T model ● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies ● WHERE..... Road conditions ● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms Customer name MR/MS B AT Model & Year VIN Trans. Model Engine Mileage Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date Frequency ❏ Continuous Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. ❏ No up-shift ❏ Intermittent ( ❏ No down-shift times a day) ❏ Particular position) (❏ Any position (❏ 1st → 2nd D ❏ 2nd → 3rd E ❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th) (❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st) F ❏ Lock-up malfunction ❏ Shift point too high or too low. ❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lock-up ❏ Any drive position) G ❏ Noise or vibration ❏ No kick down H ❏ No pattern select ❏ Others ( A/T CHECK indicator lamp ) I Blinks for about 8 seconds. Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit ❏ Continuously lit ❏ Not lit J Diagnostic Worksheet Chart 1 ❏ Read the item on “cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-41 ❏ A/T fluid inspection 2 ❏ Leak (Repair leak location.) ❏ State ❏ Amount K AT-50 L ❏ Stall test and line pressure test ❏ Stall test M ❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ Front brake ❏ High and low reverse clutch ❏ Low coast brake ❏ Forward brake ❏ Forward one-way clutch 3 ❏ 1st one-way clutch ❏ 3rd one-way clutch ❏ Engine ❏ Line pressure low ❏ Except for input clutch and direct clutch, clutches and brakes OK AT-50, AT51 ❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part: Revision; 2004 April AT-45 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ❏ Execute all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-53 Check before engine is started ❏ The A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp does come on. AT-241 . ❏ Execute self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items. AT-54 ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T. AT-110 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-157 . ❏ Direct clutch solenoid valve. AT-189 . ❏ TCC solenoid valve. AT-117 . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve.AT-127 . ❏ Input clutch solenoid valve. AT-170 . ❏ Front brake solenoid valve. AT-179 . ❏ Low coast brake solenoid valve. AT-208 . ❏ High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve. AT-198 . ❏ PNP switch. AT-105 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2. AT-146 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensors 1, 2. AT-152 . ❏ A/T interlock. AT-159 . ❏ A/T 1st engine braking. AT-166 . ❏ Start signal. AT-101 . ❏ Accelerator pedal position signal. AT-144 . ❏ Engine speed signal. AT-115 . ❏ CAN communication. AT-98 . ❏ TCM power supply. AT-132 . ❏ Battery ❏ Other 4-1. 4 Idle inspection 4-2. ❏ Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” and “N” Position. AT-243 . ❏ In “ P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed. AT-243 . ❏ In “N” Position Vehicle Moves. AT-245 . ❏ Large Shock “N” to “D” Position. AT-246 . ❏ Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. AT-249 . ❏ Vehicle does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position. AT-251 . AT-54 Driving tests Part 1 4-3. ❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-255 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-257 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-259 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-262 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5. AT-264 . ❏ A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up. AT-266 ❏ A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition. AT-269 . ❏ Lock-up Is Not Released. AT-270 . ❏ Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle. AT-271 . Revision; 2004 April AT-46 AT-55 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Part 2 A ❏ Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1. AT-255 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2. AT-257 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3. AT-259 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4. AT-262 . AT-57 B Part 3 ❏ Cannot Be Changed Manual Mode. AT-272 ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear→ 4th gear. AT-273 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear. AT-275 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear. AT-277 . ❏ A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear →1st gear. AT-279 . ❏ Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake. AT-281 . ❏ Execute self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items. 4 4-3 AT-58 D ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·A/T. AT-110 . ❏ Vehicle speed sensor·MTR. AT-157 . ❏ Direct clutch solenoid valve.AT-189 . ❏ TCC solenoid valve. AT-117 . ❏ Line pressure solenoid valve.AT-127 . ❏ Input clutch solenoid valve. AT-170 . ❏ Front brake solenoid valve. AT-179 . ❏ Low coast brake solenoid valve. AT-208 . ❏ High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve. AT-198 ❏ PNP switch. AT-105 . ❏ A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2. AT-146 . ❏ Turbine revolution sensors 1, 2. AT-152 . ❏ A/T interlock. AT-159 . ❏ A/T 1st engine braking. AT-166 . ❏ Start signal.AT-101 . ❏ Accelerator pedal position signal. AT-144 . ❏ Engine sped signal. AT-115 . ❏ CAN communication. AT-98 . ❏ TCM power supply. AT-132 . ❏ Battery ❏ Other E F G H I J 5 ❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction parts. 6 ❏ Execute all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-53 7 ❏ For any remaining NG items, execute the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts. See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection procedures.) AT-60 ❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM. AT-86, AT96 8 AT K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-47 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location ACS002B7 SCIA1999E Revision; 2004 April AT-48 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Circuit Diagram ACS002B8 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0098E Revision; 2004 April AT-49 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis ACS002B9 A/T FLUID CHECK Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . ● Fluid Condition Check Inspect the fluid condition. Fluid status Conceivable Cause Required Operation Varnished (viscous varnish state) Clutch, brake scorched Replace the A/T fluid and check the A/T main unit and the vehicle for malfunctions (wire harnesses, cooler pipes, etc.) Milky white or cloudy Water in the fluid Replace the A/T fluid and check for places where water is getting in. Large amount of metal powder mixed in Unusual wear of sliding parts within A/T Replace the A/T fluid and check for improper operation of the A/T. SAT638A STALL TEST Stall Test Procedure 1. 2. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/ T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the amount of A/T fluid. Replenish if necessary. SAT647B 3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. SCIA1224E 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the accelerator pedal. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test. Move the selector lever to the “N” position. Cool down the A/T fluid. Revision; 2004 April AT-50 SAT514G 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAUTION: Run the engine at idle for at least one minute. Stall speed: A 2,600 - 2,900 rpm Judgement Stall Test B Selector lever position D, M H Expected problem location R ● Forward brake ● Forward one-way clutch ● 1st one-way clutch ● 3rd one-way clutch O Stall rotation AT D O H ● Reverse brake L L ● Engine and torque converter one-way clutch H H ● E Line pressure low O: Stall speed within standard value position H: Stall speed higher than standard value L: Stall speed lower than standard value F Stall test standard value position G Does not shift-up D, M position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2nd, 3rd or 4th gear Direct clutch slippage Does not shift-up D, M position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3rd, 4th or 5th gear High and low reverse clutch slippage Does not shift-up D, M position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4th or 5th gear Input clutch slippage Does not shift-up D, M position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5th gear Front brake slippage H LINE PRESSURE TEST Line Pressure Test Port I J K L SCIA1291E M Line Pressure Test Procedure 1. 2. Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the A/T fluid reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F), then inspect the amount of A/T fluid and replenish if necessary. NOTE: The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driving. Revision; 2004 April AT-51 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. After warming up A/T, remove the oil pressure detection plug and install the oil pressure gauge. CAUTION: When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the Oring attached to the oil pressure detection plug. SCIA5309E 4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. SCIA1224E 5. 6. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and the stall speed. CAUTION: ● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during measurement. ● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed, refer to AT-50, "STALL TEST" . After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure detection plug and tighten to the regulation torque below. :6.3 N·m (0.64 kg-m, 56 in-lb) SAT493G CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. Line Pressure Line pressure Engine speed kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) “R” position “D” and “M” positions idle speed 392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64) 373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61) stall speed 1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218) Revision; 2004 April AT-52 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Judgement of Line Pressure Test Judgement A Possible cause Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output. For example Low for all positions (P, R, N, D, M) Idle speed Only low for a specific position B ● Oil pump wear ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue ● Oil strainer Þ oil pump Þ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak ● Engine idle speed too low AT Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after the pressure is distributed by the manual valve. D Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment function. For example High E ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction ● ATF temperature sensor malfunction ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in “OFF” state, filter clog, cut line) ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking F Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment function. For example Oil pressure does not rise higher than the oil pressure for idle. Stall speed The pressure rises, but does not enter the standard position. Only low for a specific position ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction ● TCM breakdown ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in“ ON” state) ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged H Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the line pressure adjustment function. For example ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog) ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged G I J K Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after the pressure is distributed by the manual valve. L ROAD TEST Description ● ● 1. 2. 3. ● ● The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes. The road test is carried out in the following three stages. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-54 . Check at idle. Refer to AT-54 . Cruise test ● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-55 , AT-57 , AT-58 . Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items. Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are complete. Revision; 2004 April AT-53 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Check Before Engine is Started ACS002BA 1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Move selector lever to “P” position. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-241, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" . 2. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp flash for about 8 seconds? Yes >> For TCM fail-safe mode, carry out self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostics worksheet. Refer to AT-86 , AT-96 . No >> 1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. 2. Go to AT-54, "Check at Idle" . Check at Idle ACS002BB 1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Move selector lever to “P” position. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. 4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. Does the engine start? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Stop the road test and go to AT-243, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" . 2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Turn ignition switch to “ACC” position. 2. Move selector lever in “D” or “R” position. 3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. Does the engine start in either position? Yes >> Stop the road test and go to AT-243, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" . No >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS 1. Move selector lever to “P” position. 2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. 3. Disengage the parking brake. 4. Push the vehicle forward or backward. 5. Engage the parking brake. When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move? Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves when pushed in “P” position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. No >> GO TO 4. Revision; 2004 April AT-54 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS A 1. Start the engine. 2. Move selector lever to “N” position. B 3. Disengage the parking brake. Does vehicle move forward or backward? Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle moves in “N” position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue AT the road test. No >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK D 1. Engage the brake. 2. Move selector lever to “D” position. When the transmission is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock? Yes >> Enter a check mark at “Large shock when shifted from N to D” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. No >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS 7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS Cruise Test - Part 1 I K L ACS002BC Cruise test Part 1 M 1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1 Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and A/T fluid. Appropriate temperature for the A/T fluid: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) Park the vehicle on a level surface. Move selector lever to “P” position. Start the engine. Move selector lever to “D” position. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle. With CONSULT-II Read off the gear positions. Starts from D1? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision; 2004 April H J Inspect whether the vehicle moves forward when the transmission is put into the “D” position. Does the vehicle move forward in the “D” position? Yes >> Go to AT-55, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-58, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not move forward in D position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F G 1. Engage the brake. 2. Move selector lever to “R” position. 3. Disengage the brake for 4 to 5 seconds. Does the vehicle creep backward? Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not creep backward in R position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 1. E AT-55 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-59 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift up D1 → D2 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-59 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-59 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift up D3 → D4 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 5. CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-59 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift up D4 → D5 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 6. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision; 2004 April AT-56 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. CHECK LOCK-UP A When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U. ● Refer to AT-59 . B With CONSULT-II Select “TCC SOLENOID 0.00A” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Refer to AT-86, "CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE" . AT Does it lock-up? Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not perform lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue D the road test. 7. CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD E Does it maintain lock-up status? Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T hold does not lock-up condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. F 8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE G Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate. With CONSULT-II Select “TCC SOLENOID 0.00A” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Refer to AT-86, "CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE" . Does lock-up cancel? Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up is not released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. H I J 9. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D5 → D4 K Decelerate by pressing lightly on the brake pedal. With CONSULT-II Read the gear position and engine speed. When the A/T shift down D5 → D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle? Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-57 ). No >> Enter a check mark at “A/T does not shift down” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-57 ). Cruise Test - Part 2 ACS002BD Cruise test Part 2 1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1 1. 2. Move selector lever the “D” position. Accelerate at half throttle. With CONSULT-II Read the gear position. Does it start from D1? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle cannot be started from D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision; 2004 April AT-57 2003 G35 Coupe L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D1 → D2) at the correct speed. ● Refer to AT-59 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3 Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D2 → D3) at the correct speed. ● Refer to AT-59 . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE When the transmission changes speed D3 → D4, return the accelerator pedal. Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake? Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Go to Cruise test - Part 3 (Refer to AT-58 ). No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Cruise Test - Part 3 ACS002BE Cruise test Part 3 1. MANUAL MODE FUNCTION Move to manual mode from D position. Does it switch to manual mode? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Continue road test and add checkmark to “Cannot be changed to manual mode” on diagnostics worksheet. 2. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN During manual mode driving, is downshift from 5M → 4M → 3M → 2M → 1M performed? With CONSULT-II Read the gear position. Is downshifting correctly performed? Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd, 3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision; 2004 April AT-58 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE A Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position? B Yes >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Carry out the self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-86, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" , AT-96, "Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II" . No >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake” on the diagnostics work- AT sheet, then continue trouble diagnosis. Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ACS002BF D Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position ● D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 Full throttle 58 - 62 (36 - 39) 90 - 98 (56 - 61) 140 - 150 (87 - 93) 201 - 211 (125 - 131) 197 - 207 (122 - 129) 122 - 132 (76 - 83) 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 34 - 48 (23 - 25) Half throttle 46 - 50 (29 - 31) 71 - 79 (44 - 49) 107 - 117 (66 - 73) 135 - 145 (84 - 90) 88 - 98 (55 - 61) 63 - 73 (39 - 45) 29 - 37 (18 - 23) 11 - 15 (7 - 9) F At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up ACS002BG Closed throttle Half throttle Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” 56 - 64 (35 - 40) 53 - 61 (33 - 38) 168 - 176 (104 - 109) 131 - 139 (81 - 86) ● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. ● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Closed throttle H I Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-Up Throttle position G Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position ● E ACS002BH J Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Gear position Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” 4th 37 - 45 (23 - 28) 34 - 42 (21 - 26) 5th 44 - 52 (27 - 32) 41 - 49 (25 - 30) K L At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. M Revision; 2004 April AT-59 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Chart ACS002BI The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from Item 1. Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR Shift point is high in D position. ON vehicle ON vehicle Large shock. (“N” →“ D” position) Refer to AT-246, "Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)" . ON vehicle AT-144 3. CAN communication line AT-98 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-146 5. Control valve assembly AT-294 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor ON vehicle AT-98 AT-294 1. Engine idle speed EC-34 2. Engine speed signal AT-115 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 5. ATF temperature sensor AT-146 AT-98 8. Fluid level and state AT-50 9. Line pressure test AT-51 10. Control valve assembly AT-294 11. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 AT-98 5. Engine speed signal AT-115 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 AT-50 9. Control valve assembly AT-294 10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 Revision; 2004 April AT-284 AT-233, AT-198 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Engine speed signal AT-115 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR OFF vehicle AT-110, AT-157 8. Fluid level and state 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve ON vehicle AT-229, AT-189 4. CAN communication line 2. Control linkage adjustment Shock is too large when changing D2 → D3 or M2 → M3 . AT-221, AT-179 7. CAN communication line 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR OFF vehicle AT-144 4. Control valve assembly 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve Shock is too large when changing D1 → D2 or M1 → M2 . AT-110, AT-157 3. CAN communication line 6. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve OFF vehicle AT-110, AT-157 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor 1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR Shift point is low in D position. Reference page AT-110, AT-157 8. Fluid level and state AT-50 9. Control valve assembly AT-294 10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 AT-60 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve Shock is too large when changing D3 → D4 or M3 → M4 . ON vehicle AT-98 5. Engine speed signal AT-115 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 Shock is too large when changing D4 → D5 or M4 → M5 . AT-50 9. Control valve assembly AT-294 10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 OFF vehicle ON vehicle AT-98 5. Engine speed signal AT-115 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April AT-50 9. Control valve assembly AT-294 10. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-311 11. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 3. CAN communication line AT-98 4. Engine speed signal AT-115 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 AT-110, AT-157 7. Fluid level and state AT-50 8. Control valve assembly AT-294 9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-311 10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 AT-61 B AT D E F G AT-110, AT-157 8. Fluid level and state 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR Shock is too large for downshift when accelerator pedal is pressed. AT-221, AT-179 4. CAN communication line 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR A AT-110, AT-157 8. Fluid level and state 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve ON vehicle AT-225, AT-170 4. CAN communication line 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR OFF vehicle Reference page 2003 G35 Coupe H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 3. Engine speed signal AT-115 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR Shock is too large for upshift when accelerator pedal is released. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Shock is too large for lock-up. ON vehicle Shock is too large during engine brake. OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April AT-110, AT-157 7. Fluid level and state AT-50 8. Control valve assembly AT-294 9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-311 10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 3. Engine speed signal AT-115 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Turbine revolution sensor 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR OFF vehicle Reference page AT-152 AT-110, AT-157 7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117 8. Fluid level and state AT-50 9. Control valve assembly AT-294 10. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 3. CAN communication line AT-98 4. Fluid level and state AT-50 5. Control valve assembly AT-294 6. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-311 7. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 8. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 9. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 AT-62 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Engine speed signal AT-115 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 4. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR Judder occurs during lock-up. ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Strange noise in “R” position. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Strange noise in “N” position. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Strange noise in “D” position. OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Reference page B AT-110, AT-157 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117 8. Control valve assembly AT-294 9. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Engine speed signal AT-115 3. CAN communication line AT-98 4. Control valve assembly AT-294 5. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 8. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 9. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT D E F G H I 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Engine speed signal AT-115 3. CAN communication line AT-98 4. Control valve assembly AT-294 5. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Engine speed signal AT-115 3. CAN communication line AT-98 4. Control valve assembly AT-294 5. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 8. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT-63 A J K L M 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR ON vehicle When D or M position, remains in 1st gear. OFF vehicle When D or M position, remains in 2nd gear. OFF vehicle AT-189 4. Line pressure test AT-51 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 8. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-344 9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 10. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 11. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 AT-208 4. Line pressure test AT-51 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 8. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 9. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 10. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state When D or M position, remains in 3rd gear. OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April AT-110 , AT-157 3. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR ON vehicle AT-110, AT-157 3. Direct clutch solenoid valve 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR ON vehicle Reference page AT-110, AT-157 3. Line pressure test AT-51 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Control valve assembly AT-294 6. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 8. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 9. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 10. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT-64 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state ON vehicle When D or M position, remains in 4th gear. OFF vehicle ON vehicle When D or M position, remains in 5th gear. OFF vehicle Reference page AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229,AT-189 5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198 6. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-208 7. Front brake solenoid valve AT-179 8. Line pressure test AT-51 9. CAN communication line AT-98 10. Control valve assembly AT-294 11. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 12. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 13. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 14. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 4. Line pressure test AT-51 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-65 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Vehicle cannot be started from D1 . Refer toAT-255, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . OFF vehicle Gear does not change from D1 → D2 or from M1 → M2 . Refer to AT-257, "A/ T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Gear does not change from D2 → D3 or from M2 → M3 . Refer toAT-259, "A/ T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Gear does not change from D3 → D4 or from M3 → M4 . Refer toAT-262, "A/ T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 3. Line pressure test AT-51 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Control valve assembly AT-294 6. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 7. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 8. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 9. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-344 10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 11. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 4. Line pressure test AT-51 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198 4. Line pressure test AT-51 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 5. Line pressure test AT-51 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 AT-66 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state Gear does not change from D4 → D5 or from M4 → M5 . Refer toAT-264, "A/ T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 " . ON vehicle OFF vehicle In D or M range, does not downshift to 4th gear. Refer to AT-273, "A/ T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle In D or M range, does not downshift to 3rd gear. Refer toAT-275, "A/ T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear" . ON vehicle In D or M range, does not downshift to 2nd gear. Refer toAT-277, "A/ T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 6. Line pressure test AT-51 7. CAN communication line AT-98 8. Control valve assembly AT-294 9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Line pressure test AT-51 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 5. CAN communication line OFF vehicle Reference page AT-98 6. Line pressure test AT-51 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Line pressure test AT-51 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 AT-67 2003 G35 Coupe A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state In D or M range, does not downshift to 1st gear. Refer toAT-279, "A/ T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Does not lock-up. Refer to AT-266, "A/ T Does Not Perform Lock-Up" . OFF vehicle Does not hold lockup condition. Refer toAT-269, "A/ T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Lock-up is not released. Refer toAT-270, "Lock-Up Is Not Released" . OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Reference page AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Line pressure test AT-51 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Engine speed signal AT-115 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Engine speed signal AT-115 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Engine speed signal AT-115 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 AT-68 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Does not change M5 → M4. OFF vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Does not change M3 → M2. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Does not change M2 → M1. OFF vehicle Reference page 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Manual mode switch AT-217 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-221 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Manual mode switch AT-217 5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3 Does not change M4 → M3. Revision; 2004 April Diagnostic Item AT-221, AT-225 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Manual mode switch AT-217 5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-233 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Manual mode switch AT-217 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-229 6. CAN communication line AT-98 B AT D E F G H I J K L M 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 9. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 AT-69 A 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state ON vehicle No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed D1 → D2 or M1 → M2 . OFF vehicle ON vehicle No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed D2 → D3 or M2 → M3 . OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Reference page AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Line pressure test AT-51 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 11. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Line pressure test AT-51 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT-70 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state ON vehicle No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed D3 → D4 or M3 → M4 . OFF vehicle ON vehicle AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Line pressure test AT-51 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 13. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April B AT D F G AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 H I AT-98 6. Line pressure test AT-51 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 10. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 11. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 12. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 13. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 AT-71 A E 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR 5. CAN communication line No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed D4 → D5 or M4 → M5 . Reference page J K L M 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state ON vehicle AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 5. CAN communication line When you press the accelerator pedal and shift speed D5 → D4 or M5 → M4 the engine idles or the transmission slips. OFF vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April AT-98 6. Line pressure test AT-51 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 13. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-225, AT-170 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 5. CAN communication line When you press the accelerator pedal and shift speed D4 → D3 or M4 → M3 the engine idles or the transmission slips. Reference page AT-98 6. Line pressure test AT-51 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 10. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT-72 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state ON vehicle When you press the accelerator pedal and shift speed D3 → D2 or M3 → M2 the engine idles or the transmission slips. OFF vehicle ON vehicle When you press the accelerator pedal and shift speed D2 → D1 or M2 → M1 the engine idles or the transmission slips. OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Reference page AT-50 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-233, AT-198 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Line pressure test AT-51 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 10. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 B AT D E F G 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-110, AT-157 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Line pressure test AT-51 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 10. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-344 11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 12. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT-73 A H I J K L 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Vehicle dose not decelerate by engine brake. Refer to AT-281, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . OFF vehicle ON vehicle Engine brake does not work M5 → M4. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Manual mode switch AT-217 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-229 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 9. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Manual mode switch AT-217 5. ATF pressure switch 1 AT-221 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Manual mode switch AT-217 5. ATF pressure switch 1 and ATF pressure switch 3 Engine brake does not work M4 → M3. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Engine brake does not work M3 → M2. OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Reference page AT-221, AT-225 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Manual mode switch AT-217 5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-233 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 10. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 AT-74 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Engine brake does not work M2 → M1. OFF vehicle ON vehicle With selector lever in D position, acceleration is extremely poor. OFF vehicle ON vehicle With selector lever in R position, acceleration is extremely poor. OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Manual mode switch AT-217 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-229 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 9. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 10. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. PNP switch AT-105 6. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 10. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-344 11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 12. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve B AT D E F G H I J K AT-233, AT-198 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. PNP switch AT-105 7. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 8. Control valve assembly AT-294 9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 10. Output shaft (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 11. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT-75 A 2003 G35 Coupe L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle While starting off by accelerating in 1st, engine races or slippage occurs. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Control valve assembly AT-294 6. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 7. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 8. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 9. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-344 10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 11. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve While accelerating in 2nd, engine races or slippage occurs. OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Reference page AT-229, AT-189 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 11. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT-76 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve While accelerating in 3rd, engine races or slippage occurs. OFF vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 9. 3rd one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer toAT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-336 10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 12. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 13. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. CAN communication line AT-98 B AT D E F G H I AT-225, AT-170 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 AT-77 A AT-233, AT-198 6. Control valve assembly 5. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve While accelerating in 4th, engine races or slippage occurs. Reference page 2003 G35 Coupe J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve While accelerating in 5th, engine races or slippage occurs. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Slips at lock-up. OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Reference page AT-221, AT-179 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 9. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 10. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 11. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 12. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Engine speed signal AT-115 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 AT-78 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Maximum speed low. OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. CAN communication line AT-98 5. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-189 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 8. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 9. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 10. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 11. High and low reverse clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-349 12. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 13. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 14. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-144 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve ON vehicle No creep at all. Refer toAT-249, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" , AT251, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Reference page B AT D E F AT-229, AT-189 5. PNP switch AT-105 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 8. Control valve assembly AT-294 9. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 10. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 11. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-344 12. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 13. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 14. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 15. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 16. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT-79 A G H I J K L M 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Extremely large creep. OFF vehicle With selector lever in P position, vehicle does not enter parking condition or, with selector lever in another position, parking condition is not cancelled. Refer to AT-243, "In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle Vehicle runs with transmission in “ P” position. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Vehicle runs with transmission in “N” position. Refer to AT-245, "In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" . OFF vehicle Revision; 2004 April Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Engine idle speed EC-34 2. CAN communication line AT-98 3. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-229 4. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 3. Parking pawl components (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Control valve assembly AT-294 5. Parking pawl components (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 6. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-50 3. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 4. Control valve assembly AT-294 5. Input clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-339 6. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 7. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 8. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 9. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 10. Low coast brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 AT-80 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition ON vehicle Vehicle cannot run in all positions. OFF vehicle ON vehicle With selector lever in D position, driving is not possible. OFF vehicle ON vehicle With selector lever in R position, driving is not possible. OFF vehicle Can not be changed to manual mode. Refer to AT-272, "Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode" . Revision; 2004 April Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. PNP switch AT-105 4. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 5. Control valve assembly AT-294 6. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 7. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 8. Output shaft (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. PNP switch AT-105 4. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 5. Control valve assembly AT-294 6. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 7. Oil pump assembly (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-334 8. 1st one-way clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-344 9. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 10. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 11. Forward one-way clutch* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 12. Forward brake* (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Line pressure test AT-51 3. PNP switch AT-105 4. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 5. Control valve assembly AT-294 6. Gear system (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-311 7. Output shaft (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 8. Reverse brake (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Manual mode switch AT-217 2. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 3. CAN communication line AT-98 B AT D E F G H I J ON vehicle AT-81 A 2003 G35 Coupe K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Condition Engine does not start in “N” or “P” position. Refer to AT-243, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" . Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-4, SC-10 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 3. PNP switch AT-105 ON vehicle Engine starts in positions other than “N” or “P”. ON vehicle ON vehicle Engine stall. OFF vehicle Engine stalls when selector lever shifted “N” → “D”, “R”. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Engine speed does not return to idle. Refer to AT-271, "Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle" . ON vehicle 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-4, SC-10 2. Control linkage adjustment AT-284 3. PNP switch AT-105 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Engine speed signal AT-115 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. Engine speed signal AT-115 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-152 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-117 5. CAN communication line AT-98 6. Control valve assembly AT-294 7. Torque converter (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-319 1. Fluid level and state AT-50 2. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-229, AT-189 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-221, AT-179 4. Accelerator pedal position sensor 5. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR OFF vehicle AT-144 AT-110, AT-157 6. CAN communication line AT-98 7. Control valve assembly AT-294 8. Front brake [brake band (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .)] AT-319 9. Direct clutch (ATF condition “NG” only. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" .) AT-350 *: Parts behind Drum Support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15, "Cross-Sectional View" . Revision; 2004 April AT-82 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ACS002BJ A TCM TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT B AT D SCIA0495E TCM INSPECTION TABLE Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 1 B/R Line pressure solenoid valve W Data (Approx.) After warming up the engine, release your foot from the accelerator pedal. 2V After warming up the engine, press the accelerator pedal all the way down. 0.7V – 2 E F G Battery voltage H Power supply Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. 0V I – 3 W Battery voltage J Power supply Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. 0V K SEL3 (pressure switch 3) – – – B Ground – – – 6 L CAN H – – – 7 R CAN L – – – 4 P/L 5 8 9 10 11 B/OR Fluid temperature sensor 1 R/W Power supply (Memory back-up) O/R Input clutch solenoid valve R/L Revision; 2004 April High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 2.2V When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 1.8V When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.6V Always When vehicle cruises Battery voltage When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear, or 3rd gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th gear) 0V When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4MPH) or faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear] More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4MPH)or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear] 0V AT-83 2003 G35 Coupe L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Terminal No. 12 13 Wire color Y/R W/L 14 B 15 16 17 19 20 21 Item Low coast brake solenoid valve – Battery voltage – 0V When vehicle cruises When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1 gear or M2-2 gear) Battery voltage When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in “D”) 0V Ground – – – B/W SEL4 – – – W/G SEL1 (pressure switch 2) – – – G/R Fluid temperature sensor 2 R/B Y G Front brake solenoid valve TCC solenoid valve SEL2 (pressure switch 5) 23 LG K-line (CONSULTII signal) 24 B 26 G/Y Ground 27 Y/B 30 R/W PNP switch 1 Y/R Revision; 2004 April PNP switch 2 When ATF temperature about 0°C (32°F) 2.2V When ATF temperature about 20°C (68°F) 1.7V When ATF temperature about 80°C (176°F) 0.45V When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V When lock-up More than 2V When not lock-up 0V When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd gear, or 4th gear) 0V – – – The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II. – PSC2 (pressure switch 6) Vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) OR When vehicle cruises Direct clutch solenoid valve P/B 33 Data (Approx.) Power supply (out) 22 31 Condition When vehicle cruises – – When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “ON”. 0V When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage When moving at 20 km/h (12MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. CAUTION: Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diagnosis connector. 185 (Hz) Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage Selector lever in “N” position. Less than 2.5V Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V – Battery voltage – 0V Power supply AT-84 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Terminal No. Wire color 35 B/Y Item Condition PSB2 (pressure switch 1) 36 L/Y Turbine revolution sensor 1 38 SB PNP switch 3 39 BR PNP switch 4 40 Y/G DATA BIT1 41 R When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When front brake solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage When front brake solenoid valve“ ON”. 0V When running at 50 km/h (31MPH) in 4th gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. CAUTION: Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diagnosis connector. Back-up lamp relay B 1.3 (kHz) Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage – – A AT D E – Selector lever in “R” position. 0V Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage F G 42 Y/R – Battery voltage – 0V Power supply H 45 PU 46 B 47 G/W 48 GY/R Turbine revolution sensor 2 Ground PNP switch 3 (monitor) Starter relay When vehicle cruises When moving at 20 km/h (12MPH) in 1st gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. CAUTION: Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diagnosis connector. – I 1.3 (kHz) J – – Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V Selector lever in “N” and “ P” positions. Battery voltage Selector lever in other positions. 0V K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-85 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II ACS002BK After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (Refer to AT-86 ), place check marks for results on the AT-45, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the items. NOTICE: 1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: – Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance, – Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and – Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed. 3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). 4. Additional CONSULT-II information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT-II unit. FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function Reference page Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. AT-87 Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. AT-90 CAN diagnostic support monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. — Function test Performed by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is “OK” or “NG”. — DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes. ECU (TCM) part number ECU (TCM) part number can be read. AT-93 — CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) ATF TEMP SE 1 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 V 0°C (32° F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F) ATF TEMP SE 2 TCC SOLENOID 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 V When perform slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II) CONSULT-II Setting Procedure ● 1. 2. For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on driver side. PHIA0096E Revision; 2004 April AT-86 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON” (Do not start engine). Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. A B AT SAIA0450E D 5. Touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis. If “A/T” or “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . E F G SAT014K 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME SELF-DIAGNOSIS. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. H I J SAT987J K Self-Diagnostic Result Test Mode X: Applicable, —: Not applicable TCM self-diagnosis Malfunction is detected when... A/T CHECK indicator lamp “A/T” with CONSULT-II MIL indicator lamp*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II or GST ● When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications X U1000 U1000 ● If this signal is ON other than in P or N position, this is judged to be a malfunction. (And if it is OFF in P or N position, this too is judged to be a malfunction.) X P0615 — X P0705 P0705 Items (CONSULTII screen terms) CAN COMM CIRCUIT STARTER RELAY/ CIRC PNP SW/CIRC ● PNP switch 1-4 signals input with impossible pattern ● PNP switch 3 monitor terminal cut line ● P position is detected from N position without any other position being detected in between. Revision; 2004 April AT-87 L OBD-II (DTC) 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TCM self-diagnosis Items (CONSULTII screen terms) Malfunction is detected when... OBD-II (DTC) A/T CHECK indicator lamp “A/T” with CONSULT-II MIL indicator lamp*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II or GST X P0720 P0720 ● Signal from vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) not input due to cut line or the like ● Unexpected signal input during running ● After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal input from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts moving ENGINE SPEED SIG ● TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from the ECM. X P0725 — TCC SOLENOID/ CIRC ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like X P0740 P0740 ● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation. X P0744 P0744*2 ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. X P0745 P0745 ● ● TCM-POWER SUPPLY When the power supply to the TCM is cut “OFF”, for example because the battery is removed, and the self-diagnostics memory function stops This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting “OFF” a power supply to the TCM, this message appears on the screen.) — P1701 — ● TCM·RAM ● TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning. — P1702 — TCM·ROM ● TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning. — P1703 — TCM·EEPROM ● TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning. — P1704 — ● TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM. X P1705 P1705 ● During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is excessively high or low X P1710 P0710 ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine revolution sensor 2. X P1716 P1716 ● ● Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed sensor MTR not input due to cut line or the like — P1721 — ● Unexpected signal input during running ● Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF pressure switch states are monitored and comparative judgement made. X P1730 P1730 Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is monitored and if a pattern is detected having engine braking 1st gear other than in the M1 position, a malfunction is detected. X P1731 — X P1752 P1752 VEH SPD SEN/ CIR AT (Revolution sensor) A/T TCC S/V FNCTN L/PRESS SOL/ CIRC TP SEN/CIRC A/T ATF TEMP SEN/ CIRC TURBINE REV S/ CIRC VEH SPD SE/ CIR·MTR A/T INTERLOCK ● A/T 1ST E/BRAKING I/C SOLENOID/ CIRC ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Revision; 2004 April AT-88 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TCM self-diagnosis Items (CONSULTII screen terms) Malfunction is detected when... ● I/C SOLENOID FNCTN ● ● FR/B SOLENOID/ CIRC ● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. D/C SOLENOID FNCTN ● ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. ● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like ● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. ● Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular. MANU MODE SW/ CIRC ● When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, a malfunction is detected. Revision; 2004 April AT-89 A B AT X P1754 P1754*2 D X P1757 P1757 E F X P1759 P1759*2 G H X P1762 P1762 I J X P1764 P1764*2 TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like HLR/C SOL FNCTN LC/B SOLENOID FNCT TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● HLR/C SOL/CIRC LC/B SOLENOID/ CIRC Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. ● “A/T” with CONSULT-II MIL indicator lamp*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II or GST TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● FR/B SOLENOID FNCT D/C SOLENOID/ CIRC TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) A/T CHECK indicator lamp OBD-II (DTC) K X P1767 P1767 L M X P1769 P1769*2 X P1772 P1772 X P1774 P1774*2 — P1815 — 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TCM self-diagnosis A/T CHECK indicator lamp “A/T” with CONSULT-II MIL indicator lamp*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II or GST TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) — P1841 — TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) — P1843 — TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) — P1845 — TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) — P1846 — No NG item has been detected. — X X Items (CONSULTII screen terms) Malfunction is detected when... ● ATF PRES SW 1/ CIRC ● ATF PRES SW 3/ CIRC ● ATF PRES SW 5/ CIRC ● ATF PRES SW 6/ CIRC NO DTC IS DETECTED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED ● OBD-II (DTC) *1: Refer to AT-40, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . *2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. Data Monitor Mode (A/T) X: Standard, —: Not applicable Monitor Item Selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU VHCL/S SE·A/T (km/h) X X X VHCL/S SE·MTR (km/h) X — X ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — X Accelerator pedal position signal Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by the TCM For fail-safe operation, the specific value used for control is displayed. Monitored item (Unit) Remarks Revolution sensor THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X X BATTERY BOLT (V) X — X ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X X TURBINE REV (rpm) X — X ATF TEMP 1 (°C) — X X ATF TEMP 2 (°C) — X X OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X X ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) X — X ATF TEMP SE 2 (V) X — X ATF PRES SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for FR/B solenoid) ATF PRES SW 2 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for LC/B solenoid) ATF PRES SW 3 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for I/C solenoid) Revision; 2004 April AT-90 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitor Item Selection A ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU ATF PRES SW 5 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for D/C solenoid) ATF PRES SW 6 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for HLR/C solenoid) PNP SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X — X PNP SW 2 (ON-OFF display) X — X PNP SW 3 (ON-OFF display) X — X PNP SW 4 (ON-OFF display) X — X Monitored item (Unit) Remarks B AT D 1 POSITION SW (ON-OFF display) X — X ASCD·CRUISE (ON-OFF display) X — X ASCD·OD CUT (ON-OFF display) X — X OD CONT SW (ON-OFF display) X — X MANU MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X NON M-MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X UP SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X — X DOWN SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X — X POWER SHIFT SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Not mounted but displayed. CLSO THL POS (ON-OFF display) X — X Signal input with CAN communications W/O THL POS (ON-OFF display) X — X Signal input with CAN communications TCC SOLENOID (A) — X X LINE PRES SOL (A) — X X I/C SOLENOID (A) — X X FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X X D/C SOLENOID (A) — X X HLR/C SOL (A) — X X HOLD SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Not mounted but displayed. BRAKE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Stop lamp switch GEAR — X X Gear position recognized by the TCM updated after gear-shifting GEAR RATIO — X X Not mounted but displayed. F G J SLCTLVR POSI — X X VEHICLE SPEED (km/h) — X X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM. TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X X Difference between engine speed and torque converter input shaft speed Voltage (V) — — X Displays the value measured by the voltage probe. F SUN GW REV (rpm) — — X F CARR GR REV (rpm) — — X SFT UP ST SW — — X SFT DWN ST SW — — X ABS SIGNAL — — X ACC OD CUT — — X ACC SIGNAL — — X AT-91 H I Selector lever position is recognized by the TCM. For fail safe operation, the specific value used for control is displayed. Revision; 2004 April E Not mounted but displayed. 2003 G35 Coupe K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitor Item Selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU TCS GR/P KEEP — — X TCS SIGNAL 2 — — X TCS SIGNAL 1 — — X ON OFF SOL (ON-OFF display) — — X TCC SOL MON — — X L/P SOL MON — — X I/C SL MON — — X FR/B SOL MON — — X D/C SOL MON — — X HLR/C SOL MON — — X ONOFF SOL MON — — X P POSI IND — — X R POSI IND — — X N POSI IND — — X D POSI IND — — X 4TH POSI IND — — X 3RD POSI IND — — X 2ND POSI IND — — X 1ST POSI IND — — X M MODE IND — — X POWER M LAMP — — X F-SAFE IND/L — — X ATF WARN LAMP — — X BACK-UP LAMP — — X STARTER RELAY — — X PNP SW3 MON (ON-OFF display) — — X C/VCLBID 1 — — X C/VCLBID 2 — — X C/VCLBID 3 — — X UNIT CLB ID 1 — — X UNIT CLB ID 2 — — X UNIT CLB ID 3 — — X TRGT GR RATIO — — X TRG PRE TCC — — X TRG PRE L/P — — X TRG PRE I/C — — X TRG PRE FR/B — — X TRG PRE D/C — — X TRG PRE HLR/C — — X DRV CST JUDGE — — X START RLY MON — — X Next gear — — X Monitored item (Unit) Revision; 2004 April AT-92 Remarks LC/B solenoid LC/B solenoid 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitor Item Selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU SHIFT MODE — — X MANU GR POSI — — X Frequency (Hz) — — X DUTY·HI (high) (%) — — X DUTY·LOW (low) (%) — — X PLS WIDTH·HI (ms) — — X PLS WIDTH·LOW (ms) — — X Monitored item (Unit) A Remarks B AT The value measured by the pulse probe is displayed. D DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT-II CONSULT-II Setting Procedure ● 1. 2. E For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operation Manual”. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on driver side. F G H PHIA0096E 3. 4. I Turn ignition switch “ON” (Do not start engine). Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. J K L SAIA0450E 5. Touch “A/T”. If “A/T” is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . M SAT014K Revision; 2004 April AT-93 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”. SCIA5304E 7. Touch select item menu. SCIA0512E 8. Touch “START”. SCIA5159E 9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. SCIA5160E ● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. SCIA5161E Revision; 2004 April AT-94 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. 11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with instructions displayed. 12. Touch “YES” or “NO”. 13. CONSULT-II procedure is ended. A B AT SCIA5164E If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”. D E F G SCIA5163E H I J K SCIA5162E L M Revision; 2004 April AT-95 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE DTC work support item Description Check item I/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — FR/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — D/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — HLR/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — LC/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — Following items for “TCC solenoid function (lock-up) ” can be confirmed. TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not) ● TCC solenoid valve ● Hydraulic control circuit Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) *: Do not use, but displayed. Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT-II ACS002BL OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST) Refer to EC-119, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" . OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) Refer to EC-66, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS) Description In the unlikely event of a malfunction in the electrical system, when the ignition switch is switched “ON”, the A/T CHECK indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds, then flashes for 8 seconds. If there is no malfunction, when the ignition switch is turned “ON”, the indicator lamp lights up for 2 seconds. As a method for locating the suspect circuit, when the self-diagnostics start signal is input, the memory for the malfunction location is output and the A/T CHECK indicator lamp flashes to display the corresponding DTC. Diagnostic Procedure 1. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, then leave it in the “OFF” position. Wait 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 5. Does A/T CHECK indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO AT-241, "A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On" . Revision; 2004 April AT-96 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Push shift lock release button. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position. Release accelerator pedal. (Set the closed throttle position signal “ON”.) Depress brake pedal. (Brake switch signal “ON”.) Turn ignition switch “ON”. Wait 3 seconds. Move the selector lever to the Manual shift gate side. (Manual mode switch “ON”.) Release brake pedal. (Brake switch signal “OFF”.) Move the selector lever to “D” position. (Manual mode switch “OFF”.) Depress brake pedal. (Brake switch signal “ON”.) Release brake pedal. (Brake switch signal “OFF”.) Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it. B AT D E F >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE G Check A/T CHECK indicator lamp. Refer to AT-97, "Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code" . If the system does not go into self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-237, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT" . H I >> DIAGNOSIS END Judgement Self-Diagnosis Code J If there is a malfunction, the lamp lights up for the time corresponding to the suspect circuit. K L M SCIA4758E Erase Self-Diagnosis ● ● In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after executing self-diagnostics or by erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II. Revision; 2004 April AT-97 2003 G35 Coupe DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 ACS002BM CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002BN This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II or U1000 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units. Possible Cause ACS002BO Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002BP NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-100, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-98 2003 G35 Coupe DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ACS002BQ A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0054E Revision; 2004 April AT-99 2003 G35 Coupe DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Terminal Wire Item No. color Condition Data (Approx.) 6 L CAN H – – 7 R CAN L – – Diagnostic Procedure ACS002BR 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON and start engine. 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. Is any malfunction of the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated? YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section. Refer to LAN-4, "CAN Communication Unit" . NO >> INSPECTION END PCIA0061E Revision; 2004 April AT-100 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT Description PFP:25230 A ACS002BS Prohibits cranking other at “P” or “N” position. B On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002BT This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “STARTER RELAY/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or 14th judgement flicker without AT CONSULT-II is detected when detects as irregular when switched “ON” other than at “P” or “N” position. (Or when switched “OFF” at “P” or “N” position). Possible Cause ● ● ACS002BU Harness or connectors (The starter relay and TCM circuit is open or shorted.) Starter relay circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure D E ACS002BV NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. F G WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Vehicle start for at least 2 consecutive seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-103, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I J SAT014K K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-101 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG ACS002BW TCWT0099E Revision; 2004 April AT-102 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 48 GY/R Starter relay IGN ON Data (Approx.) Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. Battery voltage Selector lever in other positions. 0V Diagnostic Procedure A B ACS002IL 1. CHECK STARTER RELAY (WITH CONSULT-II) AT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “STARTER RELAY” ON/OFF. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. D E F PCIA0056E G 2. CHECK STARTER RELAY (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) H Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check the voltage between the TCM connector and ground. Item Connector No. Starter relay F104 Terminal No. 48 Shift position Ground I Voltage (Approx.) “N” and “P” Battery voltage “R” and “D” 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. J K PCIA0060E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM L Check the following items: ● Starter relay, Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" . ● Disconnections or short-circuits in the harness between TCM and the IPDM E/R ● Disconnections or short-circuits in the harness between TCM and the combination meter OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. M 4. CHECK DTC Perform "DTC confirmation Procedure". Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. Revision; 2004 April AT-103 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-104 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Description ● ● ● – – – ● ● B ACS002BZ This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. AT Diagnostic trouble code “PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0705 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the PNP switch 1, 2, 3, 4 based on the gear D position. When monitor terminal of PNP switch 3 is disconnected. When no other position but “P” position is detected from “N” positions. E Possible Cause ● A ACS002BY The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission position switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● PFP:32006 ACS002C0 Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.] Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 3 monitor terminal disconnected DTC Confirmation Procedure F G ACS002C1 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. H I J Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds. THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V If DTC is detected, go to AT-107, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-105 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ACS002C2 TCWT0100E Revision; 2004 April AT-106 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal No. Wire color Item Condition 30 R/W 31 OR 38 SB 39 BR 47 G/W PNP switch 1 PNP switch 2 PNP switch 3 IGN ON PNP switch 4 PNP switch 3 (monitor) Data (Approx.) Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage Selector lever in “N” position. Less than 2.5V Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V Selector lever in “D” position. Less than 2.5V Selector lever in “P” position. Battery voltage Selector lever in “D” position. Battery voltage Selector lever in “R” position. Less than 2.5V Diagnostic Procedure AT D E F With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out “N·P”, “R” and “D” position switches moving selector lever to each position. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. G H I PCIA0034E 2. CHECK PNP SW CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Selector lever to “P“, “R”, “N”, or “D” position to check the voltage between the TCM connector terminals and ground. Connector No. J K L F104 Terminal No. 30(RW) Ground 31(OR) Ground M 38(SB) Ground 39(BR) Ground P Battery voltage Battery voltage – Battery voltage R – – Less than 2.5V – N Less than 2.5V – – – D – Less than 2.5V Battery voltage Less than 2.5V PCIA0035E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April B ACS002IM 1. CHECK PNP SW CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) Shift position A AT-107 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items. ● Disconnection or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and A/T unit harness connector. ● PNP switch. Refer to AT-109, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item Connector No. A/T unit assembly harness connector F8 Control valve assembly harness connector F302 A/T unit assembly harness connector F8 Control valve assembly harness connector F302 A/T unit assembly harness connector F8 Control valve assembly harness connector F302 A/T unit assembly harness connector F8 Control valve assembly harness connector F302 A/T unit assembly harness connector F8 Control valve assembly harness connector F302 Terminal No. (Wire color) Continuity 1 (G/B) Yes 2 (G/W) Yes 3 (G/R) Yes 4 (Y/R) Yes 5 (L/Y) Yes SCIA3063E 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-105, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April AT-108 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH 6. CHECK TCM A 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT Component Inspection ACS004K3 PNP SWITCH 1. Selector lever to various positions to check the continuity between terminals on the PNP switch and ground. PNP SW Shift position SW 1 Connector No. 2 (W/L) - Ground SW 3 D SW 4 2. 3. 4. Continuity F302 No F 3 (W/Y) - Ground 4 (GY) - Ground P, R, N, D E 1 (G/W) - Ground P SW 2 SW 3 Monitor Terminal No. (Wire color) D 3 (W/Y) - 5 (W/R) Yes SCIA3062E If NG, check the continuity with the control linkage disconnected. (Refer to Step 1 above.) If OK with the control linkage disconnected, adjust the control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . If NG even when the control linkage is disconnected, replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-109 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description PFP:32702 ACS002C5 The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002C6 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT” with CONSULT-II or P0720 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. After ignition switch is turned “ON”, irregular signal input from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts moving. Possible Cause ● ● ● ACS002C7 Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Revolution sensor Vehicle speed sensor MTR DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002C8 CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value. If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more SAT014K THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ENGINE SPEED: 3,500 rpm or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-110 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ACS002C9 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0101E Revision; 2004 April AT-111 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 12 27 Y/R Power supply (out) Y/B Vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) Data (Approx.) IGN ON – Battery voltage IGN OFF – 0V When vehicle cruises When moving at 20 km/h (12MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. CAUTION: Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diagnosis connector. Diagnostic Procedure 185 (Hz) ACS002CA 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS 1. 2. 3. 4. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start the engine. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. With GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 2. PCIA0033E 2. CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Start the engine. Check the pulse when vehicle cruises. Condition When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. Connector No. Terminal No. Data (Approx.) F104 27(Y/B) 185 (Hz) CAUTION: Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diagnosis connector. PCIA0018E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April AT-112 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) 3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 12 (Y/R) F6 1 (Y/R) F104 27 (Y/B) F6 10 (Y/B) B AT Continuity Yes D Yes E 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F G H SCIA3339E I 4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. J K Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) A/T unit assembly harness connector F6 1 (B) Control valve assembly harness connector F302 8 (B) A/T unit assembly harness connector F6 10 (R/Y) Control valve assembly harness connector F302 Continuity L Yes M SCIA3064E Yes 9 (R/Y) 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April AT-113 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) 5. DETECT MALFUNCTION ITEMS 1. Check control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check revolution sensor. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-110, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-114 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL Description PFP:24825 A ACS002CB The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM. B On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002CC This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “ENGINE SPEED SIG” with CONSULT-II or P0725 without CONSULT-II is AT detected when TCM does not receive the ignition signal from ECM during engine cranking or running. Possible Cause ACS002CD D Harness or connectors (The ECM to the TCM circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002CE CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. E F G WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more ACCELE POSI: More than 1/8 Selector lever: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-115, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I J SAT014K K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Diagnostic Procedure ACS002CF L 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM M With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-II Function" . With GST Follow the procedure “with CONSULT-II”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the DTC detected item, go to EC-107, "CONSULT-II Function" . ● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Revision; 2004 April AT-115 SAT014K 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL 2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. While monitoring engine speed, check for engine speed change corresponding to wide-open throttle position signal. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the ignition signal circuit. ● Refer to EC-580, "IGNITION SIGNAL" 1. 2. PCIA0041E 3. CHECK DTC Perform "DTC confirmation Procedure". Refer to AT-115, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-116 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ACS002CG The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D4 , D5 by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sen- B sor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled. Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not AT change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. ● ● ● CONSULT-II Reference Value ACS002CH D Item name TCC SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) When perform slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002CI This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0740 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● E ACS002CJ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8 SELECTOR LEVER: “D” position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected go to AT-119, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K M SAT014K Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. AT-117 J L WITH GST Revision; 2004 April H ACS002CK CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 4. G I DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. F 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV ACS002CL TCWT0102E Revision; 2004 April AT-118 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 20 Y When vehicle cruises TCC solenoid valve Data (Approx.) When lock-up More than 2V When not lock-up 0V Diagnostic Procedure B ACS002CM 1. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A AT Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. D E Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) F7 8(Y) Ground 3-9Ω Torque converter clutch solenoid valve F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA1830E G 2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. H Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F7 8 (R/B) F301 11 (R/B) I Continuity J Yes K 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3060E 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE Check valve resistance ● Refer to AT-121, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision; 2004 April AT-119 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 20 (Y) F7 8 (Y) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA1831E 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-117, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-120 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Component Inspection ACS004K4 A TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Resistance check 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid Valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 5. Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) F301 11 (BR) - Ground 3-9Ω B AT D If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . E SCIA3061E F Operation check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 11 and ground. G H I SCIA3105E J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-121 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) Description PFP:31940 ACS002CN This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5th gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002CO This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P0744 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation. Possible Cause ● ● ● ACS002CP Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002CQ CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. – – – 4. Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T with CONSULT-II. Select “TCC S/V FNCTN CHECK” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after “TESTING” shows.) ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4) TCC SOLENOID: 0.4 - 0.6 A Selector lever: “D” position [Reference speed: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50 MPH)] SAT014K Check that “GEAR” shows “5”. For shift schedule, refer to AT-371, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up" . If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-124, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to shift schedule, AT-371, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-122 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG ACS002CR A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0103E Revision; 2004 April AT-123 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 20 Y When vehicle cruises TCC solenoid valve Data (Approx.) When lock-up More than 2V When not lock-up 0V Diagnostic Procedure ACS002CS 1. CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) F7 8(Y) Ground 3-9Ω Torque converter clutch solenoid valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA1830E 2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F7 8 (R/B) F301 11 (R/B) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3060E 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE Check valve resistance ● Refer to AT-126, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision; 2004 April AT-124 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) 4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 20 (Y) F7 8 (Y) B Continuity AT Yes D 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA1831E E F 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-122, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. G H 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-125 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) Component Inspection ACS004K5 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Resistance check 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid Valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 5. Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) F301 11 (BR) - Ground 3-9Ω If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA3061E Operation check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 11 and ground. SCIA3105E Revision; 2004 April AT-126 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ACS002CT The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM. The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position signal is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position signal is “OFF”. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ● This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P0745 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. E F Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Line pressure solenoid valve G ACS002CW NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 2. 3. D ACS002CV DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. AT ACS002CU Possible Cause ● B H I Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Engine start and wait at least 5 second. If DTC is detected, go to “AT-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SAT014K WITH GST M Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-127 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV ACS002CX TCWT0104E Revision; 2004 April AT-128 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 1 B/R Line pressure solenoid valve IGN ON Data (Approx.) After warming up the engine, release your foot from the accelerator pedal. 2V After warming up the engine, press the accelerator pedal all the way down. 0.7V A B Diagnostic Procedure ACS002CY AT 1. CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No Resistance (Approx.) F7 7(B/R) Ground 3-9Ω Line pressure solenoid valve E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. G SCIA1833E 2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. H Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F7 7 (R/G) F301 10 (R/G) I Continuity J Yes K 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L SCIA3065E 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE Check valve resistance ● Refer to AT-131, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision; 2004 April AT-129 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 1 (B/R) F7 7 (B/R) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA1834E 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-127, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-130 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Component Inspection ACS004K6 A LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Resistance check 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid Valve Line pressure solenoid valve 5. Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) F301 10 (OR) Ground 3-9Ω B AT D If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . E SCIA3066E F Operation check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 10 and ground. G H I SCIA3067E J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-131 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) Description PFP:31036 ACS002CZ When the power supply to the TCM is cut “OFF”, for example because the battery is removed, and the selfdiagnostics memory function stops, malfunction is detected. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ● ACS002D0 This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “TCM-POWER SUPPLY” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the voltage signal from the battery power supply. This is not a malfunction message. (Whenever shutting “OFF” a power supply to the TCM, this message appears on the screen.) Possible Cause ACS002D1 Harness or connectors (Battery or ignition switch and TCM circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002D2 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Wait for at least 2 consecutive seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-135, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Revision; 2004 April AT-132 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER ACS004LF A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0105E Revision; 2004 April AT-133 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) TCWT0106E Revision; 2004 April AT-134 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color IGN ON 2 W Power supply IGN OFF – Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. IGN ON 3 W Power supply 5 B Ground 9 R/W Power supply (Memory back-up) 12 Y/R Power supply (out) 14 B Ground 24 B Ground 33 Y/R Power supply 42 Y/R Power supply 46 B Ground IGN OFF – Measure 3 seconds after switching “OFF” the ignition switch. – Data (Approx.) Battery voltage B 0V Battery voltage AT 0V – – D Always Battery voltage IGN ON – Battery voltage IGN OFF – 0V – – – E – – – IGN ON – Battery voltage IGN OFF – 0V IGN ON – Battery voltage IGN OFF – 0V – – Diagnostic Procedure F – G H ACS004K8 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE, STEP 1 1. 2. A I Turn ignition switch OFF. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM terminal and ground. J Item Connector No. Terminal No. Voltage TCM F103 9 - Ground Battery voltage K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. L SCIA1163E 2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE, STEP 2 1. 2. M Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between TCM terminal and ground. Item Connector No. Terminal No. Voltage 2 - Ground F103 3 - Ground 9 - Ground TCM Battery voltage 12 - Ground F104 33 - Ground PCIA0063E 42 - Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April AT-135 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 9 ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 2, 3, 33 and 42 ● 15A fuse [No.34, located in the fuse block (J/B) and fusible link block] and 10A fuse (No. 71, located in the IPDM E/R) ● Ignition switch; Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" ● A/T PV IGN relay; Refer to AT-137, "Component Inspection" ● ECM relay; Refer to EC-133, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" ● Harness for short or open between IPDM E/R terminal 33 and A/T PV IGN relay terminal 2 ● Harness for short or open between A/T PV IGN relay terminal 1 and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check continuity between TCM terminals 5, 14, 24, 46 and ground. Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA1161E 5. CHECK DTC Check again. Refer to AT-132, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-136 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1701 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (POWER SUPPLY) Component Inspection ACS004K9 A A/T PV IGN RELAY 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between A/T PV IGN relay terminals 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5. Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes OFF No 3. B AT If NG, replace A/T PV IGN relay. D SCIA1245E E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-137 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) Description PFP:31036 ACS002D6 The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. SCIA1287E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002D7 This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “TCM·RAM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory RAM is malfunctioning. Possible Cause ACS002D8 TCM DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002D9 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-139, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Revision; 2004 April AT-138 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DA 1. CHECK DTC A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-138, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . Is the “TCM·RAM” displayed again? Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END B AT D E SCIA5304E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-139 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM) DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM) Description PFP:31036 ACS002DB The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. SCIA1287E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002DC This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “TCM·ROM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory ROM is malfunctioning. Possible Cause ACS002DD TCM DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002DE NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-141, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Revision; 2004 April AT-140 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM) Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DF 1. CHECK DTC A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-140, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . Is the “TCM·ROM” displayed again? Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END B AT D E SCIA5304E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-141 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM) DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM) Description PFP:31036 ACS002DG The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. SCIA1287E On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002DH This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “TCM·EEPROM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory EEPROM is malfunctioning. Possible Cause ACS002DI TCM DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002DJ NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-143, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Revision; 2004 April AT-142 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1704 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (EEPROM) Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DK 1. CHECK DTC A With CONSULT-II 1. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. 2. Turn ignition switch ON . Confirm that CONSULT-II turn ON. 3. Move selector lever in “R” position. 4. Touch “START” on CONSULT-II. 5. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. 6. Fully press the accelerator pedal (8/8 throttle), and hold it in the fully open position. (This will set the closed throttle position signal to OFF.) 7. Touch “ERASE“ on CONSULT-II, and then touch “YES”. 8. Wait 3 seconds and then release the accelerator pedal. 9. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 10. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-142, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . Is the “TCM·EEPROM” displayed again? Yes >> Replace TCM. No >> INSPECTION END B AT D E SCIA5304E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-143 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Description PFP:22620 ACS002DL Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends signals to TCM with CAN communication. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002DM This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “TP SEN/CIRC A/T” with CONSULT-II or P1705 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM. Possible Cause ACS002DN Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002DO NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to “AT-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DP 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-107, "CONSULT-II Function" With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the DTC detected item.Go to EC-107, "CONSULT-II Function" . ● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Revision; 2004 April AT-144 SAT014K 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “ACCLE POS” and “THROTTLE POSI”. Check engine speed changes according to throttle position. 4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-111, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . 1. 2. B AT D With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. PCIA0070E E F 3. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-144, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. G H 4. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-145 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Description PFP:31940 ACS002DQ The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name Fluid temperature sensor 1 ACS002DR Condition 0°C (32°F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F) Fluid temperature sensor 2 ● ACS002DS This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1710 (A/T), P0710 (ENGINE) without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. Possible Cause ● ● 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● Display value (Approx.) (V) ACS002DT Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002DU CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.) VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-146 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ACS002DV A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0107E Revision; 2004 April AT-147 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 8 15 Fluid temperature sensor 1 B/OR B/W 17 IGN ON SEL4 When ATF temperature 0°C (32°F) 2.2V When ATF temperature 20°C (68°F) 1.8V When ATF temperature 80°C (176°F) 0.6V – Fluid temperature sensor 2 G/R IGN ON Data (Approx.) – – When ATF temperature about 0°C (32°F) 2.2V When ATF temperature about 20°C (68°F) 1.7V When ATF temperature about 80°C (176°F) 0.45V Diagnostic Procedure ACS002DW 1. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 1” or “ATF TEMP SE 2”. Condition °C (°F) Item name ATF TEMP SE1 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) ATF TEMP SE2 Display value (Approx.) V 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 2. PCIA0039E 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Check voltage between TCM connector and ground while warming up A/T. Refer to AT-147, "Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS" . Name Connector No. Fluid temperature sensor 1 Terminal No. 8 (B/OR) - 5 (B), 14 (B), 24 (B) or 46 (B) F103 Fluid temperature sensor 2 17 (G/R) - 5 (B), 14 (B), 24 (B) or 46 (B) Temperature °C (°F) Voltage (V) (Approx.) 0 (32) 2.2 20 (68) 1.8 80 (176) 0.6 0 (32) 2.2 20 (68) 1.7 80 (176) 0.45 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Disconnect the TCM connector. 5. Check if there is continuity between the connector terminal and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April AT-148 SCIA1162E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT 3. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. Name Connector No. Fluid temperature sensor 1 Fluid temperature sensor 2 F6 F7 Terminal No. (Wire color) Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (KΩ) (Approx.) 0 (32) 15 20 (68) 6.5 80 (176) 0.9 0 (32) 10 20 (68) 4 80 (176) 0.5 9 (B/OR) - 8(B/W) 1 (G/R) - 8(B/W) B AT D SCIA3614E 4. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. F G 4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 8 (BR) H I Continuity J Yes F302 6 (BR) K F6 9 (B/Y) F302 7 (B/Y) F7 1 (P) F301 3 (P) Yes L M Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK - 1 >> If fluid temperature sensor 1 on step 3 is NG, replace the control valve assmebly. OK - 2 >> If fluide temperature sensor 2 on step 3 is NG, GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April E AT-149 SCIA3558E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT 5. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 AND CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Disconnect fluid temperature sensor 2 harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between fluid temperature sensor 2 harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Fluid temperature sensor 2 harness connector Item F305 1 (GY) Control valve assembly harness connector F301 Continuity Yes 3 (GY) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3069E 6. CHECK FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 Check fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-151, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short to ground or short to power or open between TCM and A/T unit assembly harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 8. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-146, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. 9. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-150 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Component Inspection ACS004KA A FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 1. 2. Remove fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check resistance between terminal 1 and 2. B Name Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (KΩ) (Approx.) Fluid temperature sensor 2 0 (32) 10 F305 1 (GY) - 2 (B/R) 20 (68) 4 80 (176) 0.5 AT D SCIA3070E E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-151 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR Description PFP:31935 ACS002DX The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transmission. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002DY This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “TURBINE REV S/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1716 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. When TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine revolution sensor 2. Possible Cause ● ● ACS002DZ Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Turbine revolution sensor 1, 2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002E0 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more ENGINE SPEED: 1,500 rpm or more ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 or more Selector lever: “D” position Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 1): 4th or 5th position Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 2): All position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-152 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR Wiring Diagram — AT — TRSA/T ACS002E1 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0108E Revision; 2004 April AT-153 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 12 36 Y/R L/Y Power supply (out) IGN ON – Battery voltage IGN OFF – 0V When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. Turbine revolution sensor 1 When vehicle cruises 45 PU Data (Approx.) Turbine revolution sensor 2 CAUTION: Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diagnosis connector. 1.3 (kHz) When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. CAUTION: Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diagnosis connector. Diagnostic Procedure ACS002E2 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Vehicle start and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. PCIA0041E Revision; 2004 April AT-154 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR 2. CHECK TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR (WITH CONSULT-II) 1. 2. A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Check the pulse when vehicle cruises. Name Turbine revolution sensor 1 Turbine revolution sensor 2 B Condition AT When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. CAUTION: Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diagnosis connector. D When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st gear with the closed throttle position signal “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. PCIA0042E CAUTION: Connect the data link connector to the vehicle-side diagnosis connector. Item Connector No. TCM F104 Terminal No. F Data (Approx.) Name 36 (L/Y) Turbine revolution sensor 1 45 (PU) Turbine revolution sensor 2 E G 1.3 (kHz) H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. I 3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 12 (Y/R) F6 1 (Y/R) F104 36 (L/Y) F8 6 (L/Y) F104 45 (PU) F8 7 (PU) K Continuity L Yes M Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3071E Revision; 2004 April AT-155 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR 4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 1 (B) F302 8 (B) F8 6 (B/OR) F301 1 (B/OR) F8 7 (OR) F301 2 (OR) Continuity Yes Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SCIA3072E 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-152, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-156 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR Description PFP:24814 A ACS002E3 The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002E4 This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “VHE SPD SE·MTR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN communication) from combination meter. Possible Cause D E DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002E6 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 4. AT ACS002E5 Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) 1. 2. 3. B F G H Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1/8 or less VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more If DTC is detected, go to AT-157, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SAT014K Diagnostic Procedure ACS002E7 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. M 1. 2. PCIA0033E Revision; 2004 April AT-157 L 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR 2. CHECK DTC, STEP 1 Check following items. 1. Refer to AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . 2. Refer to BRC-29, "CONSULT-II Functions" . 3. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> If NG, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. 3. CHECK DTC, STEP 2 Perform DTC confirmation procedure. AT-157, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> If the system returns a malfunction, recheck pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. Revision; 2004 April AT-158 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK Description ● ● PFP:00000 A ACS002E8 Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions. Fail-safe function to the transmission range switch detects the selector position and sends a signal to the TCM. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ● ACS002E9 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “A/T INTERLOCK” with CONSULT-II or P1730 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor and switch. TCM monitors and compares gear position and conditions of each pressure switch when gear is steady. Possible Cause ● ● ● B AT D ACS002EA E Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuit is open or shorted.) Low coast brake solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 2 DTC Confirmation Procedure F ACS002EB NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. G H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds. Selector lever: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-164, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SAT014K L WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. M Revision; 2004 April AT-159 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK Wiring Diagram — AT — I/LOCK ACS002EC TCWT0109E Revision; 2004 April AT-160 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0110E Revision; 2004 April AT-161 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK TCWT0111E Revision; 2004 April AT-162 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 4 10 11 13 P/L OR R/L W/L SEL3 (pressure switch 3) High & low reverse clutch solenoid valve SEL1 (pressure switch 2) 19 R/B Front brake solenoid valve G When vehicle cruises Low coast brake solenoid valve W/G Direct clutch solenoid valve 22 P/B SEL2 (pressure switch 5) 26 G/Y PSC2 (pressure switch 6) 35 B/Y PSB2 (pressure switch 1) 40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – A – B Input clutch solenoid valve 16 21 – Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear, or 3rd gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th gear) 0V When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4MPH) or faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear] More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4MPH) or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear] 0V When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1 gear or M2-2 gear) Battery voltage When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in “D”) 0V – When vehicle cruises D – When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd gear, or 4th gear) 0V H – When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “ON”. 0V When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage When front brake solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage When front brake solenoid valve“ ON”. 0V – G I – – E F – – When vehicle cruises AT J K – L M Revision; 2004 April AT-163 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK Judgement of A/T Interlock ACS002ED When A/T Interlock is judged to be malfunctioning, the vehicle should be fixed in 2nd gear and should be set in a condition in which it can travel. When one of the following fastening patterns is detected, the fail-safe function in correspondence with the individual pattern should be performed. A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE ●: NG, X: OK ATF pressure switch output Gear position A/T interlock coupling pattern SW3 (I/C) SW6 (HLR/ C) SW5 (D/C) SW1 (FR/B) SW2 (LC/B) 3rd – X X – ● 4th – X X – 5th X X – X Fail-safe function Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe function I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ● Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ● Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Diagnostic Procedure ACS002EE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. 3. Drive vehicle. 1. 2. SAT014K Without CONSULT-II 1. Drive vehicle. 2. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 4. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-96, "TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check low coast brake solenoid valve circuit and function. Refer to AT-208, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-213, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" . 2. CHECK DTC Perform "DTC confirmation Procedure". Refer to AT-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April AT-164 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK 3. CHECK TCM A 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-165 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING Description PFP:00000 ACS002EF Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by engine brake other than at 1M position. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002EG This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “A/T 1ST E/BRAKING” with CONSULT-II or 13th judgement flicker without CONSULT-II is detected under the following condition. When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. When TCM monitors each pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when engine brake of 1st gear acts other than at 1M position. Possible Cause ● ● ● ACS002EH Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Low coast brake solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002EI NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds. ENGINE SPEED: 1,200 rpm Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 1st gear If DTC is detected, go to AT-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Revision; 2004 April AT-166 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING Wiring Diagram — AT — E/BRE ACS002EJ A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0112E Revision; 2004 April AT-167 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 13 W/L Low coast brake solenoid valve When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1 gear or M2-2 gear) Battery voltage When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in “D”) 0V 16 W/G SEL1 (pressure switch 2) – – 40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – – Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KB 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (1st gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 2”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. PCIA0067E 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 13 (W/L) F7 2 (W/L) F103 16 (W/G) F6 5 (W/G) F104 40 (Y/G) F6 2 (Y/G) Continuity Yes Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3095E Revision; 2004 April AT-168 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. A Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 2 (R) F302 10 (R) F6 5 (L) F302 13 (L) B Continuity AT Yes D E Yes F F7 2 (B/R) F301 4 (B/R) G Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H SCIA3107E I 4. CHECK DTC J Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-166, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. K 5. CHECK TCM L 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-169 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 ACS002EL Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002EM This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “I/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1752 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ACS002EN Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Input clutch solenoid valve DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002EO CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected go to “AT-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-170 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram — AT — I/C ACS002EP A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0113E Revision; 2004 April AT-171 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 10 OR Input clutch solenoid valve When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear, or 3rd gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th gear) 0V Diagnostic Procedure ACS002EQ 1. CHECK INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Input clutch solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) F7 6 (OR) Ground 3-9Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA1837E 2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F7 6 (R/W) F301 9 (R/W) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3073E 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE Check valve resistance ● Refer to AT-174, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision; 2004 April AT-172 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 10 (OR) F7 6 (OR) B AT Continuity Yes D 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA1838E E F 5. CHECK DTC G Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-170, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-173 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Component Inspection ACS004KC INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Resistance check 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid Valve Input clutch solenoid valve 5. Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) F301 9 (G) - Ground 3-9Ω If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA3074E Operation check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 9 and ground. SCIA3108E Revision; 2004 April AT-174 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Description ● ● ● – – ACS002ES This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “I/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P1754 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ● A ACS002ER Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT On Board Diagnosis Logic ● PFP:31940 D E F ACS002ET Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) Input clutch solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 3 G H DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002EU CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition. ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1754) is detected, refer to AT-177, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-227, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-175 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Wiring Diagram — AT — I/CF ACS002EV TCWT0114E Revision; 2004 April AT-176 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 4 10 40 P/L SEL3 (pressure switch 3) R/W or OR Input clutch solenoid valve Y/G DATA BIT1 Data (Approx.) – A – B When vehicle cruises When the solenoid valve operating (in 1st gear, 2nd gear, or 3rd gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear or 5th gear) 0V – AT – Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KD D 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS E With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 3”. F G With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. H PCIA0067E 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 4 (P/L) F6 7 (P/L) F103 10 (OR) F7 6 (OR) F104 40 (Y/G) F6 2 (Y/G) K Continuity L Yes M Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3109E Revision; 2004 April AT-177 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 2 (R) F302 10 (R) F6 7 (W) F302 15 (W) F7 6 (R/W) F301 9 (R/W) Continuity Yes Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3075E 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-175, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-178 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ACS002EX Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002EY This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1757 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ACS002EZ Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Front brake solenoid valve E G H I WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SAT014K M WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April D ACS002F0 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 5. AT F DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. B AT-179 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/B ACS002F1 TCWT0115E Revision; 2004 April AT-180 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 19 R/B Front brake solenoid valve When vehicle starts Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V B Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KE 1. CHECK FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Approx.) F7 5 (R/B) Ground 3-9Ω Front brake solenoid valve E F G SCIA1839E 2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY H Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F7 5 (W/R) F301 8 (W/R) I Continuity J Yes K 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L SCIA3076E 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE Check valve resistance ● Refer to AT-183, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision; 2004 April AT D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 1. 2. 3. A AT-181 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 19 (R/B) F7 5 (R/B) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA1840E 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-179, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-182 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Component Inspection ACS004KF A FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Resistance check 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid Valve Front brake solenoid valve 5. Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) F301 8 (Y) - Ground 3-9Ω B AT D If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . E SCIA3077E F Operation check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 8 and ground. G H I SCIA3079E J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-183 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Description ● ● ● – – ACS002F4 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “FR/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or P1759 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ● ACS002F3 Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● PFP:31940 ACS002F5 Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) Front brake solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 1 DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002F6 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1759) is detected, refer to AT-186, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-223, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-184 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Wiring Diagram — AT — FR/BF ACS002F7 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0116E Revision; 2004 April AT-185 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 19 R/B Front brake solenoid valve 35 B/Y PSB2 (pressure switch 1) When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve is operating (other than 4th gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (4th gear) 0V When front brake solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage When front brake solenoid valve“ ON”. 0V Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KG 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. PCIA0067E 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear). Solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve OFF ON Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F104 35 (B/Y) - Ground Voltage Battery voltage Approx. 0 V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April PCIA0066E AT-186 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION 3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 19 (R/B) F7 5 (R/B) F104 35 (B/Y) F6 3 (B/Y) TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector B AT Continuity Yes D Yes E 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F G H SCIA3080E I 4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. J K Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 3 (G) Continuity L Yes F302 12 (G) F7 5 (W/R) F301 8 (W/R) M Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3081E Revision; 2004 April AT-187 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-184, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-188 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ACS002F9 Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002FA This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “D/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1762 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● B ACS002FB Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Direct clutch solenoid valve AT D E F DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002FC NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. G H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SAT014K L WITH GST M Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-189 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram — AT — D/C ACS002FD TCWT0117E Revision; 2004 April AT-190 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 21 G Direct clutch solenoid valve When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd gear, or 4th gear) 0V A B Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KH AT 1. CHECK DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Approx.) F7 4 (G) - Ground 3-9Ω E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. G SCIA1841E H 2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. I J Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F7 4 (W/B) Continuity K Yes F301 7 (W/B) L 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3082E 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE Check valve resistance ● Refer to AT-193, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Revision; 2004 April AT-191 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 21 (G) F7 4 (G) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA1842E 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-189, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-192 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Component Inspection ACS004KI A DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Resistance check 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid Valve Direct clutch solenoid valve 5. Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) F301 7 (L) - Ground 3-9Ω B AT D If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . E SCIA3083E F Operation check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 7 and ground. G H I SCIA3084E J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-193 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Description ● ● ● – – ACS002FG This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “D/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P1764 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ● ACS002FF Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● PFP:31940 ACS002FH Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) Direct clutch solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 5 DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002FI NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1764) is detected, refer to AT-196, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-231, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-194 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Wiring Diagram — AT — D/CF ACS002FJ A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0118E Revision; 2004 April AT-195 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 21 G Direct clutch solenoid valve When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve is operating (1st gear or 5th gear) More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating (2nd gear, 3rd gear, or 4th gear) 0V 22 P/B SEL2 (pressure switch 5) – – 40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – – Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KJ 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5”. 1. 2. With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. PCIA0067E 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 21 (G) F7 4 (G) F103 22 (P/B) F6 6 (P/B) F104 40 (Y/G) F6 2 (Y/G) Continuity Yes Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3086E Revision; 2004 April AT-196 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. A Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 2 (R) F302 10 (R) F6 6 (GY) F302 14 (GY) B Continuity AT Yes D E Yes F F7 4 (W/B) F301 7 (W/B) G Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H SCIA3085E I 4. CHECK DTC J Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-194, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. K 5. CHECK TCM L 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-197 2003 G35 Coupe M DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 ACS002FL High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002FM This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “HLR/C SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1767 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ACS002FN Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002FO CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-200, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-198 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/C ACS002FP A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0119E Revision; 2004 April AT-199 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 11 R/L High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear] More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear] 0V Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KK 1. CHECK HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Approx.) F7 3 (R/L) - Ground 3-9Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA1843E 2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F7 3 (B/W) F301 5 (B/W) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3087E 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE Check valve resistance Refer to AT-202, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . ● Revision; 2004 April AT-200 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 11 (R/L) F7 3 (R/L) B AT Continuity Yes D 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA1844E E F 5. CHECK DTC G Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-198, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. H 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-201 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Component Inspection ACS004KL HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Resistance check 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid Valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve 5. Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) F301 5 (R) - Ground 3-9Ω If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA3088E Operation check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 5 and ground. SCIA3089E Revision; 2004 April AT-202 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940 Description ● ● ACS002FR High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the B PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malAT function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ACS002FS This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “HLR/C SOL FNCTN” with CONSULT-II or P1769 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 6 F H ACS002FU WITH CONSULT-II Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1769) is detected, refer to AT-205, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-200, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-235, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J L M SAT014K WITH GST AT-203 I K Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April E G CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 3. 4. 5. D ACS002FT DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. A 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Wiring Diagram — AT — HLR/CF ACS002FV TCWT0120E Revision; 2004 April AT-204 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5,14,24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 11 26 R/L G/Y High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve PSC2 (pressure switch 6) When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or faster in 1st gear or 2nd gear] More than 2V When the solenoid valve is not operating [6 km/h (4 MPH) or slower in 1st gear or 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear] 0V When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “ON”. 0V When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage Diagnostic Procedure A B AT ACS004KM 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. D E F G H PCIA0067E 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) I Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear). Solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F104 26 (G/Y) - Ground OFF ON Voltage K Battery voltage Approx. 0 V L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April J PCIA0068E M AT-205 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION 3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 11 (R/L) F7 3 (R/L) F104 26 (G/Y) F6 4 (G/Y) TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Continuity Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3090E 4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 4 (Y) F302 11 (Y) F7 3 (B/W) F301 5 (B/W) Continuity Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3091E Revision; 2004 April AT-206 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION 5. CHECK DTC A Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-203, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. B 6. CHECK TCM AT 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-207 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 ACS002FX Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002FY This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II or P1772 without CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ● ● ACS002FZ Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Low coast brake solenoid valve DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002G0 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. Selector lever: “M” position Gear position: “M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF) If DTC is detected, go to AT-210, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-208 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/B ACS002G1 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0121E Revision; 2004 April AT-209 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 13 W/L When vehicle cruises Low coast brake solenoid valve Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1 gear or M2-2 gear) Battery voltage When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in “D”) 0V Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KN 1. CHECK LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector at the transmission right side. Check the resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Approx.) F7 2 (W/L) - Ground 20 - 40 Ω Low coast brake solenoid valve OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA1835E 2. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F7 2 (B/R) F301 4 (B/R) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3092E 3. CHECK VALVE RESISTANCE Check valve resistance Refer to AT-212, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . ● Revision; 2004 April AT-210 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 13 (W/L) F7 2 (W/L) B AT Continuity Yes D 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA1836E E F 5. CHECK DTC G Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. H 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-211 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Component Inspection ACS004KO LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Resistance check 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect control valve assembly harness connector. Check resistance between terminal and ground. Solenoid Valve Low coast brake solenoid valve 5. Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) F301 4 (W) - Ground 20 - 40 Ω If NG, replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . SCIA3093E Operation check ● Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 4 and ground. SCIA3094E Revision; 2004 April AT-212 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Description ● ● ● – – ACS002G4 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “LC/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II or P1774 without CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ● A ACS002G3 Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears B will then be shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT On Board Diagnosis Logic ● PFP:31940 D E F ACS002G5 Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) Low coast brake solenoid valve ATF Pressure switch 2 G H DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002G6 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. I J WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition. Selector lever: “M” position Gear position: “M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF) Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1774) is detected, refer to AT-215, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1772) is detected, go to AT-210, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. Revision; 2004 April AT-213 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Wiring Diagram — AT — LC/BF ACS002G7 TCWT0122E Revision; 2004 April AT-214 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 13 W/L Low coast brake solenoid valve When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When the solenoid valve is operating (when running in M1-1 speed or M2-2 speed) Battery voltage When the solenoid valve is not operating (when running in “D”) 0V A B 16 W/G SEL1 (pressure switch 2) – – 40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – – Diagnostic Procedure AT ACS004KP 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the manual mode (“M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 2”. D E F G With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. H PCIA0067E 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 13 (W/L) F7 2 (W/L) F103 16 (W/G) F6 5 (W/G) F104 40 (Y/G) F6 2 (Y/G) K Continuity L Yes M Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3095E Revision; 2004 April AT-215 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 2 (R) F302 10 (R) F6 5 (L) F302 13 (L) F7 2 (B/R) F301 4 (B/R) Continuity Yes Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3096E 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-216 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH Description PFP:34901 A ACS002G9 Manual mode switch is installed in A/T device. It sends manual mode switch, shift up and shift down switch signals to TCM. TCM sends the switch signals to combination meter. by CAN communication line. Then manual mode switch position is indicated on the A/T indicator. For inspection, refer to AT-220, "Position Indicator Lamp" . CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Monitor Item Condition MANU MODE SW [ON - OFF] NON M-MODE SW [ON - OFF] UP SW LEVER [ON - OFF] DOWN SW LEVER [ON - OFF] ● ON Other than the above OFF Manual shift gate position OFF Other than the above ON Selector lever: + side ON Other than the above OFF Selector lever: - side ON Other than the above OFF ● ● ● D E F ACS002GB This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “MANU MODE SW/CIR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM monitors Manual mode, Non manual mode, Up or Down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossible input pattern occurs 1 second or more. Possible Cause ACS002GC Harness or connectors (These switches circuit is open or shorted.) Mode select switch (Built into A/T control device) Position select switch (Built into A/T control device) DTC Confirmation Procedure AT Reference Value Manual shift gate position (neutral) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ACS002GA B G H I J ACS002GD NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. M Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Move selector lever to “M” position. Start engine and drive vehicle for at least 2 consecutive seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-219, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Revision; 2004 April AT-217 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ACS002GE TCWT0123E Revision; 2004 April AT-218 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure ACS002GF 1. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT-II) A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. B AT D E PCIA0064E 2. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) F Without CONSULT-II Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “- (down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items. ● Power supply. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . ● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-220, "Component Inspection" . ● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. ● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector for A/T device (manual mode switch). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4 NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-217, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control device assembly. Refer to AT-283, "Control Device Removal and Installation" . Revision; 2004 April AT-219 2003 G35 Coupe I J K L M DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH Component Inspection ACS002GG MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check continuity between terminals. Refer to AT-218, "Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW" . Item Position Connector No. Terminal No. (Unit side) Auto Manual mode (select) switch 9 - 10 Manual UP switch 6-9 M47 Up DOWN switch Continuity Yes 8-9 Down 7-9 Position Indicator Lamp ACS002GH DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II and read out the value of “GEAR”. 3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear). OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check the following items. PCIA0065E Position Indicator Lamp Symptom Chart Items Presumed location of trouble The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in the manual mode possible). The position indicator lamp is not indicated. The actual gear position changes, but the position indicator lamp is not indicated. Manual mode switch Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated) ● Refer to AT-86, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" . Execute the self-diagnosis function. ● Refer to AT-86, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" . Execute the self-diagnosis function. The actual gear position and the indication on the position indicator lamp do not coincide. ● Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the position indicator lamp. Check the meter control unit. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . Revision; 2004 April Refer to AT-86, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)" . AT-220 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 Description PFP:25240 A ACS002GI Fail-safe function to detect front brake clutch solenoid valve condition. B On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002GJ This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that AT actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ACS002GK ATF pressure switch 1 Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) E DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002GL CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D F G H Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-223, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-181, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SAT014K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-221 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW1 ACS002GM TCWT0124E Revision; 2004 April AT-222 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 35 B/Y PSB2 (pressure switch 1) When vehicle starts Data (Approx.) When front brake solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage When front brake solenoid valve“ ON”. 0V Diagnostic Procedure A B ACS004KQ 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) AT With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. D E F PCIA0067E G 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) H Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear). Solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F104 35 (B/Y) - Ground OFF ON I Voltage J Battery voltage Approx. 0 V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. K PCIA0066E 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F104 35 (B/Y) F6 3 (B/Y) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April AT-223 SCIA3097E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 3 (G) F302 12 (G) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3098E 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-224 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 Description PFP:25240 A ACS002GO Fail-safe function to detect input clutch solenoid valve condition. B On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002GP This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that AT actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ACS002GQ ATF pressure switch 3 Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) E DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002GR CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D F G H Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-227, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-172, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SAT014K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-225 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW3 ACS002GS TCWT0125E Revision; 2004 April AT-226 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color Data (Approx.) 4 P/L SEL3 (pressure switch 3) – – 40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – – A B Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KR 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 3”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. AT D 1. 2. E F G PCIA0067E 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 4 (P/L) F6 7 (P/L) F104 40 (Y/G) F6 2 (Y/G) I Continuity J Yes K Yes SCIA3099E 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April AT-227 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 2 (R) F302 10 (R) F6 7 (W) Continuity Yes SCIA3100E Yes F302 15 (W) 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK DTC Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-228 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 Description PFP:25240 A ACS002GU Fail-safe function to detect direct clutch solenoid valve condition. B On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002GV This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that AT actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ACS002GW ATF pressure switch 5 Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) E DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002GX CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D F G H Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-231, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-191, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SAT014K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-229 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW5 ACS002GY TCWT0126E Revision; 2004 April AT-230 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 TCM terminals and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color Data (Approx.) 22 P/B SEL2 (pressure switch 5) – – 40 Y/G DATA BIT1 – – A B Diagnostic Procedure ACS004KS 1. INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. AT D 1. 2. E F G PCIA0067E 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TCM AND A/T UNIT ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 22 (P/B) F6 6 (P/B) F104 40 (Y/G) F6 2 (Y/G) I Continuity J Yes K Yes SCIA3101E 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April AT-231 2003 G35 Coupe L M DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 2 (R) F302 10 (R) F6 6 (GY) Continuity Yes SCIA3102E Yes F302 14 (GY) 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. 5. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer toAT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-232 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 Description PFP:25240 A ACS002H0 Fail-safe function to detect high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve condition. B On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ACS002H1 This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected, when TCM detects that AT actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ACS002H2 ATF pressure switch 6 Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) E DTC Confirmation Procedure ACS002H3 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D F G H Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following condition. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch OFF, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-235, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-200, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SAT014K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-233 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 Wiring Diagram — AT — FPSW6 ACS002H4 TCWT0127E Revision; 2004 April AT-234 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5,14,24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color 26 G/Y PSC2 (pressure switch 6) When vehicle cruises Data (Approx.) When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “ON”. 0V When high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve “OFF”. Battery voltage Diagnostic Procedure A B ACS004KT 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) AT With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. D E F PCIA0067E G 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) H Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Accelerate vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear). Connector No. Solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Terminal No. (Wire color) OFF ON I Voltage J Battery voltage F104 26 (G/Y) - Ground Approx. 0 V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. K PCIA0068E L 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Item TCM A/T unit assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F104 26 (G/Y) F6 4 (G/Y) M Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision; 2004 April AT-235 SCIA3103E 2003 G35 Coupe DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 4. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disconnect A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T unit assembly harness connector and control valve assembly harness connector. Item A/T unit assembly harness connector Control valve assembly harness connector Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F6 4 (Y) F302 11 (Y) Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA3104E 5. CHECK DTC Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to AT-101, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-236 2003 G35 Coupe PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT PFP:31918 Diagnostic Procedure A ACS002H6 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT B With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out “N·P”, “R” and “D” position switches moving selector lever to each position. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. AT D E PCIA0034E F 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM G Check the following items. ● Disconnection or short-circuit in the harness between TCM and PNP switch 1, 2, 3, 4. ● Disconnection or short-circuit in the harness between the PNP switch 3 monitor and TCM. ● PNP switch. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H I 3. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT J With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “MANU MODE SW”, “NON M-MODE SW”, “UP SW LEVER”, “DOWN SW LEVER”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 1. 2. K L M PCIA0064E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items. ● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . ● Check the connector housing for missing, loosening, bending or falling down of any terminal. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-237 2003 G35 Coupe PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION, MANUAL MODE, BRAKE AND THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT 5. CHECK BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “BRAKE SW”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check the following items. ● Brake switch. Refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" . ● Combination meter. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . 1. 2. PCIA0070E 6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “CLSD THL POS” and “W/O THL POS”. Monitor item Accelerator pedal operation CLSD THL POS W/O THL POS Released ON OFF Fully depressed OFF ON PCIA0070E 4. Perform the self-diagnosis for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. CHECK DTC Perform SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. ● Refer to AT-86, "CONSULT-II" . ● CAN Communication Line. Refer to AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-238 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC PFP:00007 A ACS002H7 B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0128E Revision; 2004 April AT-239 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS TCWT0129E Revision; 2004 April AT-240 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS TCM terminal and Data are reference value. Measured between each terminals 5, 14, 24 and 46 (TCM ground). Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color Data (Approx.) 6 L CAN-H – – – 7 R CAN-L – – – 23 LG K-line (CONSULT-II signal) R BACK-UP LAMP relay 41 A B The terminal is connected to the Data link connector for CONSULT-II. AT IGN ON Selector lever in “R” position. 0V Selector lever in other position. Battery voltage A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On D ACS002H8 SYMPTOM: A/T CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”. E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE F Execute the self-diagnosis.CAN communication indicated in the results? Do the self-diagnosis results indicate CAN communication? YES >> Check the CAN communication line. Refer to AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. G H 2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE 1. 2. I Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. Refer to AT-133, "Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER" . J Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) F103 9 (R/W) - Ground TCM 33 (Y/R) - Ground F104 3. 4. Voltage K Battery voltage 42 (Y/R) - Ground Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between TCM connector terminals and ground. Refer to AT-133, "Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER" . Item Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) Voltage F103 9 (R/W) - Ground Battery voltage L SCIA1672E M 33 (Y/R) - Ground TCM F104 42 (Y/R) - Ground 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April AT-241 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between battery and TCM terminal 9 ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 2,3,33 and 42 ● 15A fuse [No.34, located in the fuse and fusible link block (J/B)] and 10A fuse (No.71, located in the IPDM E/R) ● Ignition switch; Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● A/T PV IGN relay; Refer to AT-137, "Component Inspection" . ● ECM realy; Refer to EC-133, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" . ● Harness for short or open between IPDM E/R terminal 33 and A/T PV IGN relay terminal 2 ● Harness for short or open between A/T PV IGN relay terminal 1 and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Disconnect the TCM connector. Check continuity between terminals 5 (B), 14 (B), 24 (B), 46 (B) and ground. Refer to AT-133, "Wiring Diagram — AT — POWER" . 4. If OK, check the harness for short-circuit to ground or the power source. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair the short-circuit(s) in the harness or connector to ground or the power source. SCIA1161E 5. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to DI-23, "Removal and Installation for Combination Meter" . 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-242 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position ACS002H9 A SYMPTOM: ● ● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position. Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position. B DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT AT Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> GO TO 2. D 2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE E Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . F G H SCIA1904E I 3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Check starting system. Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed J K ACS002HA SYMPTOM: Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated, allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed. L DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE M 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> GO TO 2. Revision; 2004 April AT-243 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . SCIA1904E 3. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS Check parking components. Refer to AT-301, "Parking Components" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-244 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ACS004J0 A SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT Execute self-diagnosis. AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . D NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE E Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . F G H SCIA1904E 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL I Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. J K L SAT638A 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION M Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . 1. 2. SAT171B Revision; 2004 April AT-245 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ACS004J1 SYMPTOM: A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate A/T fluid temperature sensor, engine speed signal, accelerator pedal position sensor, ATF pressure switch 1, front brake solenoid valve, CAN communication line? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-146, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-179, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. ENGINE IDLE SPEED Check the engine idle speed. Refer to EC-34, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair. 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . SCIA1904E Revision; 2004 April AT-246 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL A Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refill ATF. B AT D SAT638A 5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE E Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7. F G H SAT494G 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. J K L 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. Revision; 2004 April AT-247 M 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. SAT171B 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 10. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. 11. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-248 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position ACS004J2 A SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve, CAN communication line, PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN- D SOR" , AT-233, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" , AT-198, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" , AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . E NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE F Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . G H I SCIA1904E 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL J Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. K L M SAT638A 4. CHECK STALL TEST Check stall revolution with selector lever in “M” and “R” positions. Refer to AT-50, "STALL TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. OK in “M” position, NG in “R” position>>1.Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. – Reverse brake NG in both “M” and “R” positions>>GO TO 7. SAT493G Revision; 2004 April AT-249 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check the line pressure with the engine idling. Refer to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7. SAT494G 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 12. 1. 2. SAT171B Revision; 2004 April AT-250 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● B AT 10. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. D E 11. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F G 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position I J ACS004J3 SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position. K DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS L Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication line, PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" , AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> GO TO 2. Revision; 2004 April AT-251 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . SCIA1904E 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 4. CHECK STALL TEST Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT50, "STALL TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 7. SAT493G 5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7. SAT494G Revision; 2004 April AT-252 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. E F G 8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION H Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 12. 1. 2. I J K SAT171B L 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 10. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. Revision; 2004 April AT-253 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 11. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision; 2004 April AT-254 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ACS004J4 A SYMPTOM: Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-249, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . AT D 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E Execute self-diagnosis. Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. F 3. CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION (APP) SENSOR Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. Refer to AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. G H 4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL I Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refill ATF. J K L SAT638A M 5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7. SAT494G Revision; 2004 April AT-255 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 12. 1. 2. SAT171B 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 10. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. Revision; 2004 April AT-256 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 11. CHECK TCM A 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 D E ACS004J5 SYMPTOM: F The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE G 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-251, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-255, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . H I 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS J Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 5, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-189, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL L M Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A Revision; 2004 April K AT-257 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6. SAT494G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 11. 1. 2. SAT171B Revision; 2004 April AT-258 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● B AT 9. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. D E 10. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F G 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● I J A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ACS004J6 SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed. K DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM L Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-251, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-255, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-233, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" , AT-198, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . NO >> GO TO 3. Revision; 2004 April AT-259 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6. SAT494G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. Revision; 2004 April AT-260 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 11. B AT D SAT171B E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 9. CHECK SYMPTOM F G H Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. I 10. CHECK TCM J 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K L 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision; 2004 April AT-261 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ACS004J7 SYMPTOM: ● ● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed. The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear unless A/T is warmed up. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-251, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-255, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3, front brake solenoid valve, input clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-225, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" , AT-170, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-179, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6. SAT494G Revision; 2004 April AT-262 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. E F G 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION H Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 11. 1. 2. I J K SAT171B L 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 9. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. Revision; 2004 April AT-263 2003 G35 Coupe M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 10. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ACS004J8 SYMPTOM: ● ● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed. The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-251, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-255, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, front brake solenoid valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, turbine revolution sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-179, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-189, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-152, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A Revision; 2004 April AT-264 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6. B AT D SAT494G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E 1. 2. 3. Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F G H 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. I J K L 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 11. 1. 2. M SAT171B Revision; 2004 April AT-265 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 9. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. 10. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● A/T Does Not Perform Lock-Up ACS004J9 SYMPTOM: A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine revolution sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-152, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. Revision; 2004 April AT-266 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL A Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. B AT D SAT638A 3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE E Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-51, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 4. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 5. F G H SAT494G 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. J K L 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve assembly. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-334, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-319, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 3. Revision; 2004 April AT-267 M 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 10. SAT171B 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 8. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. 9. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision; 2004 April AT-268 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Hold Lock-Up Condition ACS004JA A SYMPTOM: The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine revolution sensor, CAN communication? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER D CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-152, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . E NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL F Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. G H I SAT638A 3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION J Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7. 1. 2. K L M SAT171B 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. Revision; 2004 April AT-269 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Lock-Up Is Not Released ACS004JB SYMPTOM: The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine revolution sensor, CAN communication? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-117, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-115, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-152, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-98, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-270 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle ACS004JC A SYMPTOM: When a shift-down is performed, the engine speed does not smoothly return to the idling speed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. AT D E SAT638A F 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate front brake solenoid valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-179, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-189, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-144, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-110, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-157, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7. G H I J K L M SAT171B 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision; 2004 April AT-271 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode ACS004JD SYMPTOM: Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnosis results indicate turbine revolution sensor? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-152, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" . NO >> INSPECTION END Revision; 2004 April AT-272 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear → 4th Gear ACS004JE A SYMPTOM: When shifted from 5M to 4M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" . D NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. F G H SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE I Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . J K L SCIA1904E 4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH M Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-273 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision; 2004 April AT-274 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear → 3rd Gear ACS004JF A SYMPTOM: When shifted from 4M to 3M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-221, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-225, "DTC P1843 ATF PRES- D SURE SWITCH 3" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. F G H SAT638A I 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . J K L SCIA1904E M 4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-275 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision; 2004 April AT-276 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear → 2nd Gear ACS004JG A SYMPTOM: When shifted from 3M to 2M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 6? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-233, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" . D NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. F G H SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE I Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . J K L SCIA1904E 4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH M Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-277 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision; 2004 April AT-278 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear → 1st Gear ACS004JH A SYMPTOM: When shifted from 2M to 1M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" . D NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. F G H SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE I Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . J K L SCIA1904E 4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH M Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-279 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision; 2004 April AT-280 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ACS004JI A SYMPTOM: No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 2nd to 1st gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Execute self-diagnosis. AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-229, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" . D NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. F G H SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE I Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . J K L SCIA1904E 4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH M Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-217, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-281 2003 G35 Coupe TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-294, "Control Valve Assembly" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-50, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. SAT171B 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM 1. Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-83, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-60, "Symptom Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision; 2004 April AT-282 2003 G35 Coupe SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Control Device Removal and Installation PFP:34901 A ACS002HV B AT D E F G H I J K L SCIA1797E 1. Selector lever knob 2. Knob cover 3. Lock pin 4. Control device assembly 5. A/T device harness connector 6. Shift lock solenoid and park position switch assembly 7. Snap pin 8. Conical washer 9. Plain washer 11. Control rod 12. Dust cover 10. Pivot pin 13. Dust cover plate Revision; 2004 April AT-283 2003 G35 Coupe M SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Disconnect lower lever of control device and control rod. Remove knob cover below selector lever knob downward. Pull lock pin out of selector lever knob. Remove selector lever knob. Remove console finisher. ● Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . Remove center console. ● Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . Remove key interlock cable from control device assembly. ● Refer to AT-291, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" . Disconnect A/T device harness connector. Remove control device assembly. SCIA4962E INSTALLATION Install in reverse order of removal. Be careful of the following: ● After installation is completed, adjust and check A/T position. Adjustment of A/T Position 1. 2. 3. ACS002HW Loosen nut of pivot pin. Place PNP switch and selector lever in “P” position. While pressing lower lever toward rear of vehicle (in “P” position direction), tighten nut to specified torque. : 23.0 - 29.4 N·m (2.4 - 2.9 kg-m, 17 - 21 ft-lb) SCIA1904E Checking of A/T Position ACS002HX 1. 2. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). Check that selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also check that selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. 3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and the transmission body. 5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown in the figure. 6. When select button is pressed in “P”, “R”, or “N” position without applying forward/backward force to selector lever, check button operation for sticking. 7. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the “R” position. Confirm the back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is in the “P” or “N” position with the lever pushed against the “R” position. 8. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in SCIA3906E the “P” and “N” positions. And confirm that the engine can be started when the selector lever is being moved back and front in the “P” position. 9. Check that transmission is locked completely in “P” position. 10. When selector lever is set to manual shift gate, check that manual mode is displayed on combination meter. Revision; 2004 April AT-284 2003 G35 Coupe SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Shift selector lever to “+” and “-” sides, and check that set shift position changes. (Only while a car is operating) A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-285 2003 G35 Coupe A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:34950 ACS002HY The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”. The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder. Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ACS002HZ SCIA1799E Revision; 2004 April AT-286 2003 G35 Coupe A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT ACS002I0 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TCWT0130E Revision; 2004 April AT-287 2003 G35 Coupe A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure ACS002I1 SYMPTOM 1: ● Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied. ● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released. ● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder. SYMPTOM 2: ● Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position. ● Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”. 1. CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Check key interlock cable for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace key interlock cable. Refer to AT-291, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE" . 2. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION Check selector lever position for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Check the voltage between stop lamp switch connector E124 terminal 3 (Y/G) and ground. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. SCIA1794E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: 1. Harness for short or open between ignition switch and stop lamp switch terminal 3 2. 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] 3. Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-288 2003 G35 Coupe A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM 5. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH A Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector E124 terminals 3 (Y/G) and 4 (G). B AT D SCIA1796E E Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F 6. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. Check continuity between A/T device harness connector M47 terminal 1 (B) and ground. H Continuity should exist. I If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 4. Connect A/T device connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J SCIA1902E K 7. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. L Connect A/T device harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Selector lever is set in “P” position. Check sift lock solenoid and park position switch operation. Condition Brake pedal When ignition switch is turned to “ON” position and selector lever is set in “P” position. Depressed Released M Operation Yes OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision; 2004 April AT-289 2003 G35 Coupe A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch connector E124 terminal 4 (G) and A/T device harness connector M47 terminal 2 (G). OK or NG OK >> Replace shift lock solenoid or park position switch. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision; 2004 April AT-290 2003 G35 Coupe KEY INTERLOCK CABLE KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Components PFP:34908 A ACS002I6 B AT D E F G H I J K L SCIA1800E CAUTION: ● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. ● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one. Revision; 2004 April AT-291 2003 G35 Coupe M KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Removal 1. 2. ACS002I7 Unlock slider by squeezing lock tabs on slider from adjuster holder. Remove casing cap from bracket of control device and remove interlock rod from key interlock cable. SCIA1230E 3. Remove holder from key cylinder and remove key interlock cable. SCIA1231E Revision; 2004 April AT-292 2003 G35 Coupe KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. ACS002I8 A Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. Clamp cable and fix to control cable with band. Turn ignition key to lock position. Set selector lever to P position. B AT D E F G SCIA1231E H 5. 6. 7. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder. Install casing cap to bracket. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod. CAUTION: Do not touch any adjacent parts of key interlock cable when slider is being held. Insert slider into key interlock rod straightly. I J K SCIA1232E L M Revision; 2004 April AT-293 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Control Valve Assembly PFP:00000 ACS004JJ CAUTION: When replacing the control valve assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" . COMPONENTS SCIA3441E 1. Transmission 2. Control valve assembly 3. Bracket 4. Fluid temperature sensor 2 5. Oil pan gasket 6. Oil pan 7. Magnet 8. Drain plug gasket 9. Drain plug 10. Oil pan mounting bolt REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the negative battery terminal Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. Drain ATF through drain plug. Revision; 2004 April AT-294 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 4. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. A B AT SCIA2308E D 5. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. E F G SCIA4770E 6. Disconnect fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. H I J SCIA3975E 7. Remove terminal cord assembly connectors from bracket. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. K L M SCIA3977E 8. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA2313E Revision; 2004 April AT-295 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 9. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness then remove terminal clips. CAUTION: Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb removal of control valve assembly. SCIA2314E 10. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve assembly. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 42 (1.65) 5 B 55 (2.17) 6 C 40 (1.57) 1 SCIA2312E 11. Remove control valve assembly from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. SCIA3984E 12. Remove fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve assembly. SCIA2582E 13. Remove bracket from fluid temperature sensor 2. SCIA2583E Revision; 2004 April AT-296 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE INSTALLATION CAUTION: After completing installation, check fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . 1. Install fluid temperature sensor 2 in bracket. A B AT D E SCIA2813E 2. Install fluid temperature sensor 2 in control valve assembly. (With bracket.) F : 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb) G H SCIA2582E I 3. a. Install control valve assembly. Install control valve assembly in transmission case. J K L SCIA2315E M CAUTION: ● Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve assembly. ● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. SCIA2479E b. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve assembly. Revision; 2004 April AT-297 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 42 (1.65) 5 B 55 (2.17) 6 C 40 (1.57) 1 SCIA2312E c. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other bolts. : 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb) SCIA3170E 4. Install terminal cord assembly connectors in bracket. SCIA3977E 5. Connect terminal cord assembly connectors. SCIA4770E 6. Connect fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. SCIA3975E Revision; 2004 April AT-298 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 7. Connect revolution sensor connector. A B AT SCIA2313E 8. D Securely fasten terminal harness with terminal clips. E F G SCIA2314E 9. a. b. Install oil pan in transmission case. Install oil pan gasket in oil pan. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil pan gasket. ● Install it in the direction to align hole positions. H Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) in transmission case. CAUTION: ● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as shown in the figure. ● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. J I K L SCIA2308E c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numerical order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. CAUTION: Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts. : 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb) 10. Install drain plug in oil pan. CAUTION: Do not reuse drain plug gasket. SCIA4113E : 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) 11. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 12. Connect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. 13. Connect the negative battery terminal Revision; 2004 April AT-299 2003 G35 Coupe M ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Oil Seal ACS004KV REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove exhaust tube with power tool.Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Remove propeller shaft.Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" . Remove rear oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly. SCIA3428E INSTALLATION CAUTION: After completing installation, check fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid" ,AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . 1. As shown below, use a drift to drive rear oil seal into the extension until it is flush. CAUTION: ● Apply ATF to rear oil seal. ● Do not reuse rear oil seal SCIA5310E 2. 3. Install propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" . Install exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Revision; 2004 April AT-300 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Parking Components ACS004KU A COMPONENTS B AT D E F G H I J SCIA4769E 1. Rear oil seal 2. Terminal bracket 3. Rear extension 4. Pawl shaft 5. Return spring 6. Parking actuator support 7. Parking pawl 8. Self-sealing bolt 9. Needle bearing 10. Bearing race 11. Output shaft K L 12. Seal ring 13. Parking gear REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. M Drain ATF through drain plug. Remove exhaust tube with power tool.Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Remove propeller shaft.Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" . Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and terminal bracket. SCIA3426E Revision; 2004 April AT-301 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 5. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer. SCIA3432E 6. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. SCIA3431E 7. Remove bearing race from output shaft. SCIA3522E 8. Remove output shaft from transmission case. SCIA3430E 9. Remove parking gear from output shaft. 10. Remove seal rings from output shaft. SCIA3521E Revision; 2004 April AT-302 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 11. Remove needle bearing from rear extension. 12. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension. A B AT D SCIA3423E 13. Remove parking pawl, pawl shaft and return spring from rear extension. E F G SCIA3424E H 14. Remove return spring from parking pawl. I J K SCIA2445E 15. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear extension. L M SCIA3524E Revision; 2004 April AT-303 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE INSTALLATION CAUTION: After completing installation, check fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-13, "Checking A/T Fluid" . 1. As shown below, use a drift to drive rear oil seal into the rear extension until it is flush. CAUTION: ● Apply ATF to rear oil seal. ● Do not reuse rear oil seal. SCIA5311E 2. Install return spring in parking pawl. SCIA2445E 3. Install parking pawl and pawl shaft in rear extension. SCIA3424E 4. 5. 6. Install parking actuator support in rear extension. Install needle bearing in rear extension. CAUTION: Apply petroleum to needle bearing. Install seal rings in out put shaft. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum to seal rings. SCIA3423E Revision; 2004 April AT-304 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 7. Install parking gear in output shaft A B AT SCIA3521E D 8. Install output shaft in transmission case. E F G SCIA3430E 9. Install bearing race in output shaft. H I J SCIA3522E 10. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-47, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in illustration. CAUTION: Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. From the transmission case and rear extension assembly. L M SCIA4773E 11. Install rear extension assembly in transmission case. SCIA3431E Revision; 2004 April AT-305 K 2003 G35 Coupe ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 12. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified torque.(Because terminal bracket is tightened together with rear extension assy before procedure 11) CAUTION: Do not reuse self–sealing bolt. Rear extension mounting bolt : 52 N·m (5.3 Kg-m, 38 ft-lb) Self-sealing bolt : 61 N·m (6.2 Kg-m, 45 ft-lb) SCIA3426E 13. Install propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" 14. Install exhaust tube. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . 15. Install drain plug in oil pan. CAUTION: Do not reuse drain plug gasket. 16. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Revision; 2004 April AT-306 2003 G35 Coupe AIR BREATHER HOSE AIR BREATHER HOSE Removal and Installation PFP:31098 A ACS002I9 Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure. B AT D E F G SCIA0860E CAUTION: ● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending the hose. ● When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the tube bend R portion. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-307 2003 G35 Coupe TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:31020 ACS002IA SCIA3435E 1. Transmission assembly 2. A/T fluid charging pipe 3. O-ring 6. Bracket 4. Fluid cooler tube 5. Copper washer 7. Engine rear member 8. Insulator REMOVAL CAUTION: When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edge. 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove engine under cover with power tool. 3. Remove exhaust tube with power tool. Refer to EX-3, "EXHAUST SYSTEM" . 4. Remove three way catalyst. Refer to EM-22, "Removal and Installation" . 5. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT" . 6. Remove A/T control rod. Refer to AT-283, "SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM" . 7. Disconnect A/T solenoid valve harness connectors. Revision; 2004 April AT-308 2003 G35 Coupe TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. Remove fluid cooler tube and A/T fluid charging pipe. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc. Remove air breather hose. Refer to AT-307, "AIR BREATHER HOSE" . Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" . Remove dust cover from converter housing part. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four tightening bolts for drive plate and torque converter. SCIA0861E CAUTION: When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack. CAUTION: When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug. Remove engine rear member with power tool. Remove bolts fixing A/T assembly to engine with power tool. Remove A/T assembly from vehicle with a transmission jack. ● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. ● Secure A/T assembly to a transmission jack. A B AT D E F G H I SCIA0499E INSPECTION Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter ● J After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to check distance A to ensure it is within the reference value limit. Distance A K : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more L M SAT017B INSTALLATION Install the removed parts in the reverse order of the removal, while paying attention to the following work. ● When installing transmission to the engine, attach the fixing bolts in accordance with the following standard. Bolt No. 1 2 3 Number of bolts 1 5 2 55 (2.17) 65 (2.56) 35 (1.38) Bolt length “ ”mm (in) Tightening torque N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) 70 - 80 (7.2 - 8.1, 52 - 59) 41.2 - 52.0 (4.2 - 5.3, 31 - 38) SCIA0903E Revision; 2004 April AT-309 2003 G35 Coupe TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ● Align the positions of tightening bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque. : 51 N·m (5.2 kg-m, 38 ft-lb) CAUTION: ● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. ● When tightening the tightening bolts for the torque converter after fixing the crankshaft pulley bolts, be sure to ATA1292D confirm the tightening torque of the crankshaft pulley mounting bolts. ● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that transmission rotates freely without binding. ● Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-26, "OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER" . ● After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and the positions of A/T. Refer to AT-13, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-284, "Adjustment of A/T Position" , AT-284, "Checking of A/T Position" . ● When replacing the A/T assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" . Revision; 2004 April AT-310 2003 G35 Coupe OVERHAUL OVERHAUL Components PFP:00000 A ACS004JK B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA4615E Revision; 2004 April AT-311 2003 G35 Coupe OVERHAUL 1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring 4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter 7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race 10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly 13. Needle bearing 14. Snap ring 15. Front sun gear 16. 3rd one-way clutch 17. Snap ring 18. Bearing race 19. Needle bearing 20. Seal ring 21. Input clutch assembly 22. Needle bearing 23. Rear internal gear 24. Brake band 25. Mid carrier assembly 26. Needle bearing 27. Bearing race 28. Rear carrier assembly 29. Bearing race 30. Mid sun gear 31. Seal ring 32. Rear sun gear 33. 1st one-way clutch 34. Snap ring 35. Needle bearing 36. High and low reverse clutch hub 37. Snap ring 38. Bearing race 39. Needle bearing Revision; 2004 April AT-312 2003 G35 Coupe OVERHAUL A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA3413E 1. High and low reverse clutch assembly 2. Needle bearing 3. Direct clutch assembly 4. Needle bearing 5. Reverse brake dish plate 6. Reverse brake driven plate Revision; 2004 April AT-313 2003 G35 Coupe OVERHAUL 7. N-sprig 8. Snap ring 9. Reverse brake retaining plate 10. Reverse brake drive plate 11. Snap ring 12. Spring retainer 13. Return spring 14. Reverse brake piston 15. D-ring 16. Lip seal Revision; 2004 April AT-314 2003 G35 Coupe OVERHAUL A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA4772E 1. Rear oil seal 2. Terminal bracket 3. Rear extension 4. Parking actuator support 5. Return spring 6. Parking pawl 7. Pawl shaft 8. Seal ring 9. Needle bearing Revision; 2004 April AT-315 2003 G35 Coupe OVERHAUL 10. Terminal cord assembly 11. Revolution sensor 12. Parking gear 13. Output shaft 14. Bearing race 15. Needle bearing 16. Manual plate 17. Parking rod 18. Manual shaft oil seal 19. Manual shaft 20. O-ring 21. Band servo anchor end pin 22. Detent spring 23. Spacer 24. Seal ring 25. Transmission case 26. Retaining pin 27. Return spring 28. O-ring 29. Servo assembly 30. Snap ring 31. Control valve assembly 32. Bracket 33. Fluid temperature sensor 2 34. Oil pan gasket 35. Oil pan 36. Magnet 37. Drain plug 38. Drain plug gasket 39. Oil pan mounting bolt Revision; 2004 April AT-316 2003 G35 Coupe OVERHAUL Oil Channel ACS004JL A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA4771E Revision; 2004 April AT-317 2003 G35 Coupe OVERHAUL Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ACS004JM SCIA3370E Revision; 2004 April AT-318 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY Disassembly PFP:31020 A ACS004KW CAUTION: ● Do not disassemble parts behind Drum Support. Refer to AT-15, "Cross-Sectional View" . B ● When replacing the control valve assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" . 1. Drain ATF through drain hole. AT 2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turing while pulling straight out. D E F SCIA2297E 3. a. b. c. G Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as shown at figure. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into one-way clutch outer race. When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one- way clutch spline using screwdriver. Check that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace torque converter assembly. H I J K L M SCIA3171E 4. Remove converter housing from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch converter housing. SCIA3427E Revision; 2004 April AT-319 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly. SCIA2299E 6. Remove tightening bolts for oil pump assembly and transmission case. SCIA2300E 7. Attach sliding hammer to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from transmission case. CAUTION: ● Fully tighten sliding hammer screw. ● Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump assembly edge surface. SCIA5474E Revision; 2004 April AT-320 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 8. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly. A B AT SCIA3417E D 9. Remove bearing race, needle bearing and front sun gear from transmission case. NOTE: Remove front sun gear by rotating left/right. E F G SCIA3418E 10. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly. H I J SCIA2470E 11. Remove front carrier assembly from transmission case. (With input clutch assembly and rear internal gear.) CAUTION: Be careful to remove it with needle bearing. K L M SCIA3419E Revision; 2004 April AT-321 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 12. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from transmission case. SCIA2579E 13. Remove brake band from transmission case. SCIA2580E ● ● To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in the figure at left. Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band. Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns. SAT655 14. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a unit. SCIA2304E 15. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly. Revision; 2004 April AT-322 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 16. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly. A B AT SCIA2805E D 17. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly. 18. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly. E F G SCIA2804E 19. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly. H I J SCIA2803E 20. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly and high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit. CAUTION: Be careful to remove then with bearing race and needle bearing. K L M SCIA2305E 21. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from transmission case. CAUTION: Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and low reverse clutch assembly edge surface. SCIA2306E Revision; 2004 April AT-323 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 22. Remove direct clutch assembly from transmission case. 23. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface. SCIA2307E 24. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. SCIA2308E 25. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. ● If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR" , CO-16, "RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)" . SAT171B 26. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA3412E Revision; 2004 April AT-324 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 27. Disconnect fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. A B AT SCIA2581E D 28. Remove terminal cord assembly connectors from bracket. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. E F G SCIA2584E 29. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. H I J SCIA2313E 30. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness then remove terminal clips. CAUTION: Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb removal of control valve assembly. L M SCIA2314E 31. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve assembly. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 42 (1.65) 5 B 55 (2.17) 6 C 40 (1.57) 1 SCIA2312E Revision; 2004 April AT-325 K 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 32. Remove control valve assembly from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.Remove it vertically. SCIA2315E 33. Remove fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve assembly. SCIA2582E 34. Remove bracket from fluid temperature sensor 2. SCIA2583E 35. Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and transmission case. SCIA3426E Revision; 2004 April AT-326 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 36. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer. A B AT SCIA3420E D 37. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With needle bearing) E F G SCIA3421E H 38. Remove bearing race from output shaft. I J K SCIA3522E 39. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/ right. L M SCIA3422E Revision; 2004 April AT-327 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 40. Remove parking gear from output shaft. SCIA3521E 41. Remove seal rings from output shaft. 42. Remove needle bearing from transmission case. SCIA2440E 43. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage harness with the edge of case. SCIA2320E 44. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) using 2 flatbladed screwdrivers. NOTE: Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using another screwdriver. SCIA2321E Revision; 2004 April AT-328 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 45. Remove reverse brake retaining plate, drive plate, driven plate and dish plate from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful to remove it with N-spring. A B AT SCIA2322E D 46. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) using a flat-bladed screwdriver. E F G SCIA2323E H 47. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmission case. I J K SCIA2324E 48. Remove seal rings from drum support. L M SCIA3333E Revision; 2004 April AT-329 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 49. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case. SCIA2325E 50. Remove lip seal and D-ring from reverse brake piston. SCIA2795E 51. Remove terminal cord assembly connectors from bracket. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA2326E 52. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case. SCIA2327E Revision; 2004 April AT-330 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 53. Use a pin punch (4mm dia. commercial service tool) to knock out retaining pin. A B AT SCIA2328E D 54. 55. 56. 57. Remove manual shaft retaining pin with nippers. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft. Remove parking rod from manual plate. Remove manual shaft from transmission case. E F G SCIA2329E H 58. Remove manual shaft oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch transmission case. I J K SCIA2331E 59. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case. L M SCIA2332E Revision; 2004 April AT-331 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 60. Using snap ring pliers, Remove snap ring from transmission case. SCIA2333E 61. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmission case. 62. Remove return spring from servo assembly. 63. Remove O-rings from servo assembly. SCIA2334E 64. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension. SCIA3423E 65. Remove parking pawl, pawl shaft and return spring from rear extension. SCIA3424E Revision; 2004 April AT-332 2003 G35 Coupe DISASSEMBLY 66. Remove return spring from parking pawl. A B AT SCIA2445E D 67. Remove needle bearing from rear extension. 68. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear extension. E F G SCIA3524E H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-333 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Oil Pump PFP:00000 ACS004JO COMPONENTS SCIA2835E 1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 4. Oil pump housing 5. Oil pump housing oil seal 3. O-ring DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover. SCIA2836E 2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing. SCIA2840E Revision; 2004 April AT-334 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing. A B AT SCIA2841E D 4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover. E F G SCIA2837E ASSEMBLY 1. H Install O-ring in oil pump cover. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. I J K SCIA2837E 2. L Install O-ring in oil pump housing. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. M SCIA2841E Revision; 2004 April AT-335 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 3. Install oil seal in oil pump housing. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil seal. ● Apply ATF to oil seal. SCIA5313E 4. Install oil pump housing in oil pump cover. : 9.0 N·m (0.92 kg-m, 80 in-lb.) SCIA2836E Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ACS004JP COMPONENTS SCIA3114E 1. Front sun gear Revision; 2004 April 2. 3rd one-way clutch AT-336 3. Snap ring 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS DISASSEMBLY 1. A Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from front sun gear. B AT SCIA3110E 2. D Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear. E F G SCIA3111E H INSPECTION 3rd One-Way Clutch ● I Check frictional surface for wear or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the 3rd one-way clutch. J Front Sun Gear Snap Ring ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the snap ring. K Front Sun Gear ● L Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the front sun gear. M ASSEMBLY 1. Install 3rd one-way clutch in front sun gear. CAUTION: Apply ATF to 3rd one-way clutch. SCIA3111E Revision; 2004 April AT-337 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in front sun gear. SCIA3110E 3. a. b. Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch. Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear. Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking directions. CAUTION: If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of 3rd one-way clutch. SCIA3131E Revision; 2004 April AT-338 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ACS004JQ A COMPONENTS B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA3043E 1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing 4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Needle bearing 7. Snap ring 8. Snap ring 9. Retaining plate 10. Driven plate 11. Input clutch drum 12. Drive plate 13. Rear internal gear Revision; 2004 April AT-339 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove front carrier assembly from rear internal gear. SCIA2844E a. Remove bearing race from front carrier. SCIA2847E b. Remove needle bearing from front carrier. SCIA2848E c. Remove snap ring from front carrier. SCIA2852E Revision; 2004 April AT-340 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 2. a. Remove input clutch assembly from rear internal gear. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly. A B AT SCIA2849E D b. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly. E F G SCIA2853E c. d. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from input clutch drum. Remove drive plate, driven plate and retaining plate from input clutch drum. H I J SCIA2864E K INSPECTION Front Carrier Snap Ring ● L Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the snap ring. M Input Clutch Snap Ring ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly. Input Clutch Drum ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly. Input Clutch Drive Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly. Input Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Revision; 2004 April AT-341 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS CAUTION: If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly. Front Carrier ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the front carrier assembly. Rear Internal Gear ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the rear internal gear assembly. ASSEMBLY 1. a. b. Install input clutch. Install drive plate, driven plate and retaining plate in input clutch drum. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in input clutch drum. SCIA2864E c. d. Install needle bearing in input clutch assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. Install O-ring and seal rings in input clutch assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring and seal rings. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. SCIA2853E 2. Install input clutch assembly in rear internal gear. SCIA2849E 3. Install front carrier assembly. Revision; 2004 April AT-342 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS a. Install snap ring in front carrier. A B AT SCIA2852E D b. Install needle bearing in front carrier. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. E F G SCIA2848E c. Install bearing race in front carrier. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. H I J SCIA2847E d. K Install front carrier assembly in input clutch and rear internal gear. L M SCIA2850E Revision; 2004 April AT-343 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub ACS004JR COMPONENTS SCIA2851E 1. Needle bearing 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring 4. High and low reverse clutch hub 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring 7. 1st one-way clutch 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring 10. Mid sun gear DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove needle bearing and bearing race. SCIA2854E 2. Using a snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from high and low reverse clutch hub. SCIA2855E Revision; 2004 April AT-344 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear assembly. A B AT SCIA2856E D a. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub. E F G SCIA2857E 4. Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly. H I J SCIA2858E a. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from rear sun gear. K L M SCIA2859E Revision; 2004 April AT-345 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS b. Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear. SCIA2860E 5. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear. SCIA2861E INSPECTION High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the snap ring. 1st One-Way Clutch ● Check frictional surface for wear or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the 1st one-way clutch. Mid Sun Gear ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: Replace mid sun gear assembly and high and low reverse clutch assembly as a set if necessary. Rear Sun Gear ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the rear sun gear. High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the rear sun gear. Revision; 2004 April AT-346 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ASSEMBLY 1. A Install seal rings from mid sun gear. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. B AT SCIA2861E 2. Install 1st one-way clutch in rear sun gear. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to 1st one-way clutch. D E F G SCIA2860E 3. H Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in rear sun gear. I J K SCIA2859E 4. Install rear sun gear assembly in mid sun gear assembly. L M SCIA2858E Revision; 2004 April AT-347 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 5. Install needle bearing in high and low reverse clutch hub. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA2857E 6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub in mid sun gear assembly. SCIA2856E 7. Using a snap ring pliers, install snap ring in high and low reverse clutch hub. SCIA2855E 8. a. b. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear. Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking directions. CAUTION: If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of 1st one-way clutch. SCIA3132E Revision; 2004 April AT-348 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 9. Install needle bearing and bearing race. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and bearing race. A B AT SCIA2854E D High and Low Reverse Clutch ACS004JS COMPONENTS E F G H I J SCIA2865E 1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 3. K Retaining plate DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. L Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from high and low reverse clutch drum. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from high and low reverse clutch drum. M SCIA2868E INSPECTION ● Check the following, and replace high and low reverse clutch assembly and mid sun gear assembly as a set if necessary. High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Revision; 2004 April AT-349 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in high and low reverse clutch drum. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in high and low reverse clutch drum. SCIA2868E 3. Direct Clutch ACS004JT COMPONENTS SCIA2867E 1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 3. Retaining plate DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from direct clutch drum. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from direct clutch drum. SCIA2868E INSPECTION ● Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary. Direct Clutch Snap Ring ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. Revision; 2004 April AT-350 2003 G35 Coupe REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Direct Clutch Drive Plates ● A Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Direct Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. B ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in direct clutch drum. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in direct clutch drum. AT D E SCIA2868E F G H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-351 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY Assembly (1) 1. PFP:00000 ACS004KX As shown below, use a drift (commercial service tool φ22) to drive manual shaft oil seal into the transmission case until it is flush. CAUTION: ● Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seal. ● Do not reuse manual shaft oil seal. SCIA2423E 2. Install detent spring and spacer in transmission case. SCIA2332E 3. 4. a. b. Assemble manual shaft, manual plate, and parking rod after installing manual shaft to transmission case. Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft. Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate. CAUTION: ● Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm over the manual plate. ● Do not reuse retaining pin. SCIA3172E 5. a. b. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft. Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission case. CAUTION: ● Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm over the transmission case. ● Do not reuse retaining pin. SCIA2427E Revision; 2004 April AT-352 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 6. Install terminal cord assembly in transmission case. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. A B AT SCIA2428E D 7. Install terminal cord assembly connectors in bracket. E F G SCIA2326E 8. Install O-rings in servo assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings. Apply petroleum jelly to O-rings. 9. Install return spring in servo assembly. 10. Install servo assembly in transmission case. H I J K L SCIA2334E M 11. Using snap ring pliers, install snap ring in transmission case. SCIA2333E Revision; 2004 April AT-353 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 12. Install lip seal and D-ring in reverse brake piston. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse lip seal and D-ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly to lip seal. ● Apply ATF to D-ring. SCIA2795E 13. Install reverse brake piston in transmission case. SCIA2325E 14. Install seal rings in drum support. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. SCIA3333E 15. Install needle bearing in transmission case. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA2796E Revision; 2004 April AT-354 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 16. After installing the return spring and spring retainer in transmission case, use a clutch spring compressor to install snap ring in transmission case. CAUTION: Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver so that snap ring tension is slightly weak. A B AT SCIA5314E D 17. Install reverse brake retaining plate, drive plate, driven plate and dish plate in transmission case. E F G SCIA2322E 18. Assemble N-spring. H I J K L M SCIA3179E 19. Install snap ring in transmission case. SCIA2439E Revision; 2004 April AT-355 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 20. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate. Specified clearance “A”: Standard: 0.7 - 1.1mm (0.028 - 0.043 in) Retaining plate: Refer to AT-373, "Reverse Brake" . SCIA3129E 21. Install needle bearing in transmission case. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA2440E 22. Install revolution sensor in transmission case. SCIA2320E 23. As shown below, use a drift to drive rear oil seal into the extension until it is flush. CAUTION: ● Apply ATF to rear oil seal. ● Do not reuse rear oil seal. SCIA5311E 24. Install return spring in parking pawl. SCIA2445E Revision; 2004 April AT-356 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 25. Install parking pawl and pawl shaft in rear extension. A B AT SCIA3424E D 26. Install parking actuator support in rear extension. E F G SCIA3423E 27. Install seal rings in output shaft. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. 28. Install parking gear in output shaft. H I J K L SCIA3521E 29. Install output shaft in transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.) M SCIA3422E Revision; 2004 April AT-357 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 30. Install bearing race in output shaft. 31. Install needle bearing in output shaft. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA3522E 32. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-47, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .) to rear extension assy as shown in illustration. CAUTION: Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. From the transmission case and rear extension mounting surfaces. SCIA2450E 33. Install rear extension assembly in transmission case. SCIA3421E 34. Tighten rear extension assembly mounting bolts to specified torque. (Because terminal bracket is tightened together with output shaft & companion flange, it should be installed before procedure 33.) CAUTION: Do not reuse self-sealing bolt. Rear extension assy mounting bolt: : 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb) Self-sealing bolt: : 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb) Revision; 2004 April SCIA3426E AT-358 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 35. Install direct clutch assembly in transmission case. CAUTION: Make sure that drum support edge surface and direct clutch inner boss edge surface come to almost same place. 36. Install needle bearing in high and low reverse clutch drum. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. A B AT SCIA2307E D 37. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in transmission case. CAUTION: Be sure to replace high and low reverse clutch and mid sun gear as a set. E F G SCIA2306E 38. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, range the drive plate. H I J SCIA3169E K 39. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly and rear sun gear assembly in transmission case. L M SCIA2305E Revision; 2004 April AT-359 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Check that portion A of high and low reverse clutch drum protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of rear sun gear. SCIA3130E 40. Install needle bearing in rear carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. 41. Install bearing race in rear carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. SCIA2803E 42. Install rear carrier assembly in transmission case. SCIA2462E 43. Install needle bearing (rear side) in mid carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA2804E Revision; 2004 April AT-360 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 44. Install needle bearing (front side) in mid carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. A B AT SCIA2805E D 45. Install mid carrier assembly in transmission case. E F G SCIA2304E 46. Install front carrier assembly in transmission case. (With input clutch assembly and rear internal gear.) H I J SCIA3419E 47. Install seal rings in input clutch assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. K L M SCIA2470E 48. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut in transmission case. CAUTION: Do not reuse band servo anchor end pin. SCIA2579E Revision; 2004 April AT-361 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 49. Install brake band in transmission case. CAUTION: Assemble it so that identification to avoid incorrect installation faces servo side. SCIA5498E 50. Install front sun gear in transmission case. CAUTION: Apply ATF to front sun gear bushing and one-way clutch end bearing. SCIA3418E 51. Install needle bearing in front sun gear. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA2808E 52. Adjust brake band tilting using clips so that brake band contacts front sun gear drum evenly. SCIA2473E 53. Adjust brake band. a. Loosen lock nut. b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to specified torque. : 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb) c. d. Back of band servo anchor end pin three turns. While band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to specified torque. SCIA5498E Revision; 2004 April AT-362 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY Adjustment ACS004KY A TOTAL END PLAY ● ● Measure clearance between front sun gear and needle bearing for oil pump cover. Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within specifications. B AT D SCIA2810E 1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension “J”. E F G SCIA3121E a. H Measure dimension “K”. I J K SCIA3122E L b. c. Measure dimension “L”. Calculate dimension “J”. M “J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of transmission case and needle bearing mating surface of front sun gear. J=K–L SCIA3123E Revision; 2004 April AT-363 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 2. Measure dimensions “M1 ” and “M2 ” and then calculate dimension “M”. SCIA3125E a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly. SCIA3124E b. Measure thickness of straightedge “M1 ”. SCIA3126E c. d. Measure thickness of straightedge “M2 ”. Calculate dimension “M”. “M”: Distance between trans mission case fitting surface of oil pump and needle bearing on oil pump. M = M1 – M2 SCIA3127E 3. Adjust total end play “T1 ”. T1 = J – M Total end play “T1 ”: 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) ● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play is within specifications. Bearing races: Revision; 2004 April Refer to AT-373, "BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY" . AT-364 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY Assembly (2) ACS004KZ A CAUTION: When replacing the control valve assembly, erase EEP ROM in TCM. Refer to AT-8, "Precautions for TCM, A/T Assembly and Control Valve Assembly Replacement" . B 1. Install O-ring in oil pump assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. AT ● Apply ATF to O-ring. 2. Install bearing race in oil pump assembly. CAUTION: D Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. 3. Install oil pump assembly in transmission case. CAUTION: E Apply ATF to oil pump bush. F G SCIA2811E 4. H Apply recommended sealant (Genuine RTV silicone sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-47, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .) to oil pump assembly as shown in illustration. CAUTION: Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. From the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting bolt mounting surfaces. I J K SCIA4628E 5. Tighten oil pump mounting bolts to specified torque. CAUTION: Apply ATF to oil pump bushing. L M SCIA2300E Revision; 2004 April AT-365 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 6. Install O-ring in input clutch assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. SCIA2299E 7. Install converter housing in transmission case. CAUTION: Do not reuse self-sealing bolt. Converter housing mounting bolt: : 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb) Self-sealing bolt: : 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb) SCIA3427E 8. Make sure that brake band does not close turbine revolution sensor hole. SCIA2479E 9. Install fluid temperature sensor 2 in bracket. SCIA2813E 10. Install fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve assembly. SCIA2582E Revision; 2004 April AT-366 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 11. Install control valve assembly. a. Install control valve assembly in transmission case. A B AT SCIA2315E CAUTION: ● Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve assembly. ● Make sure that turbine sensor securely installs turbine sensor hole. ● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. D E F G H SCIA2812E b. I Install bolts A, B and C in control valve assembly. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 42 (1.65) 5 B 55 (2.17) 6 C 40 (1.57) 1 J K L SCIA2312E c. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other bolts. : 7.9 N·m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb) SCIA3170E Revision; 2004 April AT-367 2003 G35 Coupe M ASSEMBLY 12. Install terminal cord assembly connectors in bracket. SCIA2584E 13. Connect terminal cord assembly connectors. SCIA3412E 14. Connect fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. SCIA2581E 15. Connect revolution sensor connector. SCIA2313E 16. Securely fasten terminal harness with clip. SCIA2314E Revision; 2004 April AT-368 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY 17. Install oil pan in transmission case. a. Install oil pan gasket in oil pan. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil pan gasket. ● Install it in the direction to align hole positions. b. A B Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) in transmission case. CAUTION: ● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as shown in the figure. ● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. AT D E SCIA2308E F c. Tighten oil pan mounting bolts to the specified torque in numerical order shown in the figure after temporarily tightening them. CAUTION: Do not reuse oil pan mounting bolts. 18. Install drain plug in oil pan. CAUTION: Do not reuse drain plug gasket. G H I SCIA2492E 19. Install torque converter. a. Pour ATF into torque converter. ● Approximately 2 liter (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid is required for a new torque converter. ● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of fluid as was drained. J K L M SAT428DA b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque converter with notches of oil pump. SCIA2297E Revision; 2004 April AT-369 2003 G35 Coupe ASSEMBLY c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper position. Distance “A”: : 25.0 mm (0.98 in) or more SAT017B Revision; 2004 April AT-370 2003 G35 Coupe SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 A ACS002IB Applied model VQ35DE engine Automatic transmission model B RE5R05A Transmission model code number 90X17,91X18 Stall torque ratio 2.0 : 1 Transmission gear ratio 1st 3.540 2nd 2.264 3rd 1.417 4th 1.000 5th 0.834 Reverse 2.370 Recommended fluid AT D E Nissan Matic Fluid J*1 Fluid capacity F 10.3 liter (10-7/8 US qt, 9-1/8 Imp qt) CAUTION: ● Use only Nissan Genuine ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid. ● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Nissan Genuine ATF Matic Fluid J will deteriorate in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty. G *1: Refer to MA-9, "Fluids and Lubricants" . H Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ACS002IC Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position ● D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 Full throttle 58 - 62 (36 - 39) 90 - 98 (56 - 61) 140 - 150 (87 - 93) 201 - 211 (125 - 131) 197 - 207 (122 - 129) 122 - 132 (76 - 83) 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 34 - 48 (23 - 25) Half throttle 46 - 50 (29 - 31) 71 - 79 (44 - 49) 107 - 117 (66 - 73) 135 - 145 (84 - 90) 88 - 98 (55 - 61) 63 - 73 (39 - 45) 29 - 37 (18 - 23) 11 - 15 (7 - 9) I J At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. K Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-Up ACS002ID Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position Closed throttle Half throttle Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” 56 - 64 (35 - 40) 53 - 61 (33 - 38) 168 - 176 (104 - 109) 131 - 139 (81 - 86) ● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. ● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-Up L M ACS002IE Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position Closed throttle ● Gear position Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” 4th 37 - 45 (23 - 28) 34 - 42 (21 - 26) 5th 44 - 52 (27 - 32) 41 - 49 (25 - 30) At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. Stall Speed ACS002IF Stall speed Revision; 2004 April 2,600 - 2,900 rpm AT-371 2003 G35 Coupe SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Line Pressure ACS002IG Line pressure Engine speed kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) R position D, M positions idle speed 392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64) 373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61) stall speed 1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218) Solenoid Valves ACS002IH Name Resistance (Approx.) (Ω) Terminal No. Line pressure solenoid valve 7 Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 8 Input clutch solenoid valve 6 3-9 High & low reverse clutch solenoid valve 3 Front brake solenoid valve 5 Direct clutch solenoid valve 4 Low coast brake solenoid valve 20 - 40 2 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor Name A/T fluid temperature sensor 1 A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 ACS002II Condition CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR” (Approx.) (V) Resistance (Approx.) (kΩ) 0°C (32°F) 2.2 15 20°C (68°F) 1.8 6.5 80°C (176°F) 0.6 0.9 0°C (32°F) 2.2 10 20°C (68°F) 1.7 4 80°C (176°F) 0.45 0.5 Turbine Revolution Sensor Name Turbine revolution sensor 1 Turbine revolution sensor 2 ACS002IJ Condition Data (Approx.) When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th speed with the closed throttle position switch “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link connector to the vehicle diagnosis connector. When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st speed with the closed throttle position switch “OFF”, use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. 1.3 (kHz) CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link connector to the vehicle diagnosis connector. Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) Name Revolution sensor Revision; 2004 April Condition When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH), use the CONSULT-II pulse frequency measuring function. CAUTION: Connect the diagnosis data link connector to the vehicle diagnosis connector. AT-372 ACS002IK Data (Approx.) 185 (Hz) 2003 G35 Coupe SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Reverse Brake ACS004JX A Thickness mm (in) Part number* 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) Thickness of retaining plates 31667-90X14 31667-90X15 31667-90X16 31667-90X17 31667-90X18 31667-90X19 B AT *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Total End Play Total end play ACS004JY mm (in) D 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217) BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY Thickness mm (in) E Part number* 1.2 (0.047) 1.4 (0.055) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 2.0 (0.079) 31435-90X02 31435-90X03 31435-90X04 31435-90X05 31435-90X06 F G *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. H I J K L M Revision; 2004 April AT-373 2003 G35 Coupe SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision; 2004 April AT-374 2003 G35 Coupe
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : Yes Create Date : 2004:04:13 14:57:56 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows Title : AT.fm Creator : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145J Modify Date : 2004:06:03 17:24:22-07:00 Page Count : 374 Page Mode : UseOutlinesEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools